Fujitsu M10 4 Users Manual 4/Fujitsu 4S/SPARC 4/SPARC 4S Service
2015-01-29
: Fujitsu Fujitsu-M10-4-Users-Manual-219334 fujitsu-m10-4-users-manual-219334 fujitsu pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 520
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/
SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S
Service Manual
Manual Code: C120-E682-06EN
December 2013
Copyright © 2007, 2013, Fujitsu Limited. All rights reserved.
Oracle and/or its affiliates provided technical input and review on portions of this material.
Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited each own or control intellectual property rights relating to products and technology described in this document, and such products,
technology and this document are protected by copyright laws, patents, and other intellectual property laws and international treaties.
This document and the product and technology to which it pertains are distributed under licenses restricting their use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No part of such
product or technology, or of this document, may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited, and
their applicable licensors, if any. The furnishings of this document to you does not give you any rights or licenses, express or implied, with respect to the product or technology to
which it pertains, and this document does not contain or represent any commitment of any kind on the part of Oracle or Fujitsu Limited or any affiliate of either of them.
This document and the product and technology described in this document may incorporate third-party intellectual property copyrighted by and/or licensed from the suppliers to
Oracle and/or its affiliates and Fujitsu Limited, including software and font technology.
Per the terms of the GPL or LGPL, a copy of the source code governed by the GPL or LGPL, as applicable, is available upon request by the End User. Please contact Oracle and/or its
affiliates or Fujitsu Limited. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the
University of California.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited.
SPARC Enterprise, SPARC64, SPARC64 logo and all SPARC trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the United States and other
countries and used under license.
Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S. Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered
to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such,
use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or
documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
Disclaimer: The only warranties granted by Oracle and Fujitsu Limited, and/or any affiliate in connection with this document or any product or technology described herein are those
expressly set forth in the license agreement pursuant to which the product or technology is provided.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN SUCH AGREEMENT, ORACLE OR FUJITSU LIMITED, AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES MAKE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIE
S OF ANY KIND (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED) REGARDING SUCH PRODUCT OR TECHNOLOGY OR THIS DOCUMENT, WHICH ARE ALL PROVIDED AS IS, AND ALL EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
Unless otherwise expressly set forth in such agreement, to the extent allowed by applicable law, in no event shall Oracle or Fujitsu Limited, and/or any of their affiliates have any
liability to any third party under any legal theory for any loss of revenues or profits, loss of use or data, or business interruptions, or for any indirect, special, incidental or
consequential damages, even if advised of the possibility of such damages.
DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH
DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
Copyright © 2007, 2013, Fujitsu Limited. Tous droits réservés.
Oracle et/ou ses affiliés ont fourni et vérifié des données techniques de certaines parties de ce composant.
Oracle et/ou ses affiliés et Fujitsu Limited détiennent et contrôlent chacun des droits de propriété intellectuelle relatifs aux produits et technologies décrits dans ce document. De
même, ces produits, technologies et ce document sont protégés par des lois sur le droit d’auteur, des brevets, et d'autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle et des traités internationaux.
Ce document, le produit et les technologies afférents sont exclusivement distribués avec des licences qui en restreignent l'utilisation, la copie, la distribution et la décompilation.
Aucune partie de ce produit, de ces technologies ou de ce document ne peut être reproduite sous quelque forme que ce soit, par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite
préalable d'Oracle et/ou ses affiliés et de Fujitsu Limited, et de leurs éventuels concédants de licence. Ce document, bien qu'il vous ait été fourni, ne vous confère aucun droit et
aucune licence, exprès ou tacites, concernant le produit ou la technologie auxquels il se rapporte. Par ailleurs, il ne contient ni ne représente aucun engagement, de quelque type que
ce soit, de la part d'Oracle ou de Fujitsu Limited, ou des sociétés affiliées de l'une ou l'autre entité.
Ce document, ainsi que les produits et technologies qu'il décrit, peuvent inclure des droits de propriété intellectuelle de parties tierces protégés par le droit d’auteur et/ou cédés sous
licence par des fournisseurs à Oracle et/ou ses sociétés affiliées et Fujitsu Limited, y compris des logiciels et des technologies relatives aux polices de caractères.
Conformément aux conditions de la licence GPL ou LGPL, une copie du code source régi par la licence GPL ou LGPL, selon le cas, est disponible sur demande par l'Utilisateur Final.
Veuillez contacter Oracle et/ou ses affiliés ou Fujitsu Limited. Cette distribution peut comprendre des composants développés par des parties tierces. Des parties de ce produit
pourront être dérivées des systèmes Berkeley BSD licenciés par l'Université de Californie.
UNIX est une marque déposée de The OpenGroup.
Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées d'Oracle Corporation et/ou de ses affiliés.
Fujitsu et le logo Fujitsu sont des marques déposées de Fujitsu Limited.
SPARC Enterprise, SPARC64, le logo SPARC64 et toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous licence et sont des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc., aux Etats-Unis et
dans d'autres pays.
Tout autre nom mentionné peut correspondre à des marques appartenant à leurs propriétaires respectifs.
Si ce logiciel, ou la documentation qui l'accompagne, est concédé sous licence au Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, ou à toute entité qui délivre la licence de ce logiciel ou l'utilise pour le
compte du Gouvernement des Etats-Unis, la notice suivante s'applique :
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered
to U.S. Government end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such,
use, duplication, disclosure, modification, and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or
documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
Avis de non-responsabilité : les seules garanties octroyées par Oracle et Fujitsu Limited et/ou toute société affiliée de l'une ou l'autre entité en rapport avec ce document ou tout
produit ou toute technologie décrits dans les présentes correspondent aux garanties expressément stipulées dans le contrat de licence régissant le produit ou la technologie fournis.
SAUF MENTION CONTRAIRE EXPRESSEMENT STIPULEE AU DIT CONTRAT, ORACLE OU FUJITSU LIMITED ET/OU LES SOCIETES AFFILIEES A L'UNE OU L'AUTRE
ENTITE DECLINENT TOUT ENGAGEMENT OU GARANTIE, QUELLE QU'EN SOIT LA NATURE (EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE) CONCERNANT CE PRODUIT, CETTE
TECHNOLOGIE OU CE DOCUMENT, LESQUELS SONT FOURNIS EN L'ETAT. EN OUTRE, TOUTES LES CONDITIONS, DECLARATIONS ET GARANTIES EXPRESSES OU
TACITES, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE, A L'APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A
L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON, SONT EXCLUES, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI APPLICABLE. Sauf mention contraire expressément stipulée dans ce contrat,
dans la mesure autorisée par la loi applicable, en aucun cas Oracle ou Fujitsu Limited et/ou l'une ou l'autre de leurs sociétés affiliées ne sauraient être tenues responsables envers une
quelconque partie tierce, sous quelque théorie juridique que ce soit, de tout manque à gagner ou de perte de profit, de problèmes d'utilisation ou de perte de données, ou
d'interruptions d'activités, ou de tout dommage indirect, spécial, secondaire ou consécutif, même si ces entités ont été préalablement informées d'une telle éventualité.
LA DOCUMENTATION EST FOURNIE "EN L'ETAT" ET TOUTE AUTRE CONDITION, DECLARATION ET GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU TACITE, EST FORMELLEMENT
EXCLUE, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI EN VIGUEUR, Y COMPRIS NOTAMMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE A LA QUALITE MARCHANDE,
A L'APTITUDE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU A L'ABSENCE DE CONTREFACON.
Contents
Preface
xxi
Chapter 1
Before Starting Maintenance Work
1.1
Warning/Caution Indications
1.2
Warning Labels
1.3
Labels/Tags
1.4
Safety Precautions
1.5
Notes Regarding Static Electricity
1.6
Other Precautions
1.7
Emergency Power Off
Chapter 2
1
1
2
2
5
6
7
8
Understanding the System Components
11
2.1
Identifying the Names and Locations of Components
2.2
Confirming the Functions of the Operation Panel
2.3
2.4
2.2.1
Display function of the operation panel
19
2.2.2
Control function of the operation panel
20
Checking the LED Indications
Operation panel LEDs
2.3.2
LEDs on the rear panel (System locator)
2.3.3
LEDs on each component
23
Confirming the Types of Cable
Types of cable
2.4.2
Cable connection ports
16
23
2.3.1
2.4.1
11
24
26
29
29
29
iii
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.1
Suspected Failure Conditions
3.2
Determining the Causes of Individual Failures
3.3
Identifying a Failure
34
3.3.2
Checking error messages
3.3.3
Checking the status of a component
3.3.4
Checking the status of a PCI expansion unit
3.3.5
Checking log information
3.3.6
Checking the messages output by the predictive self-repairing
35
35
35
37
38
39
Identifying the location of the chassis requiring maintenance
Downloading Error Log Information
Chapter 4
Preparing for Maintenance
41
Preparing Tools Required for Maintenance
4.2
Confirming the System Configuration
41
41
4.2.1
Confirming the hardware configuration
4.2.2
Confirming the software and firmware configurations
Understanding Types of Maintenance
Chapter 5
42
42
44
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
53
5.1
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Command
5.2
Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition
5.3
Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance
5.4
Stopping the Entire System
5.5
56
Stopping the system with the XSCF command
63
5.4.2
Stopping the system from the operation panel
63
64
5.5.1
Lowering the cable support
5.5.2
Removing the power cord
65
5.5.3
Removing the front cover
67
Chapter 6
60
62
5.4.1
Accessing Components
40
40
4.1
4.3
33
Checking the LED indications
3.3.7
3.4
33
3.3.1
tool
iv
33
64
Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
69
53
6.1
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command
69
6.2
Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition
6.3
Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance
6.4
Starting the Entire System
6.5
Starting the system with an XSCF command
75
6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel
75
Restoring the Chassis
76
6.5.1
Installing the power cord
76
6.5.2
Fixing the cable support
78
6.5.3
Installing the front cover
79
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
83
7.1
Configuration of the CPU Memory Units
83
7.2
Before Maintaining a CPU Memory Unit
85
7.4
7.5
73
74
6.4.1
Chapter 7
7.3
71
7.2.1
Types of maintenance
85
7.2.2
Maintenance flow
7.2.3
Precautions for replacement
7.2.4
Precautions for installation
7.2.5
Precautions for removal
86
87
87
88
Enabling the Removal of a CPU Memory Unit
7.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
7.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
7.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
Removing a CPU Memory Unit
88
89
89
90
91
7.4.1
Accessing a CPU memory unit
7.4.2
Removing the CPU memory unit lower
96
7.4.3
Removing the CPU memory unit upper
98
7.4.4
Removing a PCI Express cable
Installing a CPU Memory Unit
92
105
124
7.5.1
Installing a PCI Express cable
124
7.5.2
Installing the CPU memory unit upper
136
Contents
v
7.6
7.5.3
Installing the CPU memory unit lower
7.5.4
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
147
Active/Cold maintenance
7.6.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
7.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
Maintaining the Memory
Memory Configuration
8.2
Memory Configuration Rules
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
148
149
152
159
8.1
8.3
vi
146
7.6.1
Chapter 8
159
163
8.2.1
Memory mounting rules
8.2.2
Checking memory information
164
Before Maintaining Memory
168
8.3.1
Types of maintenance
168
8.3.2
Maintenance flow
8.3.3
Precautions for replacement
8.3.4
Precautions for installation
8.3.5
Precautions for removal
169
169
170
170
8.4.1
Active/Cold maintenance
8.4.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
8.4.3
System-stopped maintenance
170
171
172
173
8.5.1
Accessing memory
173
8.5.2
Removing memory
173
Installing Memory
167
169
Enabling the Removal of Memory
Removing Memory
146
174
8.6.1
Installing memory
8.6.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
174
175
175
8.7.1
Active/Cold maintenance
175
8.7.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
8.7.3
System-stopped maintenance
176
178
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
Chapter 9
Maintaining the Crossbar Units
179
9.1
Configuration of the Crossbar Units
179
9.2
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit
180
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.2.1
Types of maintenance
9.2.2
Maintenance flow
180
181
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit
9.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
9.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
9.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
Removing a Crossbar Unit
182
182
183
184
9.4.1
Accessing a crossbar unit
184
9.4.2
Removing a crossbar unit
184
Installing a Crossbar Unit
186
9.5.1
Installing a crossbar unit
9.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
187
187
187
9.6.1
Active/Cold maintenance
9.6.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
9.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 10
181
187
188
190
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
191
10.1
Configuration of the Power Supply Units
191
10.2
Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit
192
10.3
10.2.1
Types of maintenance
192
10.2.2
Maintenance flow
10.2.3
Precautions for replacement
193
193
Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit
10.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
10.3.2
Active/Cold maintenance
195
10.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
196
10.3.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
10.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
194
194
197
198
Contents
vii
10.4
10.5
10.6
Removing a Power Supply Unit
198
10.4.1
Accessing a power supply unit
199
10.4.2
Removing a power supply unit
199
Installing a Power Supply Unit
200
10.5.1
Installing a power supply unit
10.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
200
200
10.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
10.6.2
Active/Cold maintenance
201
10.6.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
202
10.6.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
10.6.5
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 11
201
Maintaining the Fan Units
202
Configuration of the Fan Units
205
11.2
Before Maintaining a Fan Unit
206
11.4
11.5
11.6
203
205
11.1
11.3
200
11.2.1
Types of maintenance
207
11.2.2
Maintenance flow
11.2.3
Precautions for replacement
207
207
Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit
11.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
11.3.2
Active/Cold maintenance
209
11.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
209
11.3.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
11.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
Removing a Fan Unit
Accessing a fan unit
213
11.4.2
Removing a fan unit
213
211
211
214
11.5.1
Installing a fan unit
11.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
208
212
11.4.1
Installing a Fan Unit
208
214
214
214
viii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
11.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
11.6.2
Active/Cold maintenance
215
11.6.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
216
11.6.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
11.6.5
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 12
12.1
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
216
217
Maintaining the Internal Disks
219
Configuration of the Internal Disks
219
12.1.1
12.2
215
Identification of disk slot
220
Before Maintaining an Internal Disk
12.2.1
Types of maintenance
12.2.2
Maintenance flow
12.2.3
Precautions for installation
12.2.4
Precautions for removal
226
226
226
227
227
Enabling the Removal of an Internal Disk
12.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
12.3.2
Active/Cold maintenance
229
12.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
230
12.3.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
12.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
Removing an Internal Disk
228
230
231
231
12.4.1
Accessing an internal disk
232
12.4.2
Removing an internal disk
232
Installing an Internal Disk
233
12.5.1
Installing an internal disk
12.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
227
233
234
234
12.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
234
12.6.2
Active/Cold maintenance
235
12.6.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
236
12.6.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
12.6.5
System-stopped maintenance
236
237
Contents
ix
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
13.1
Configuration of the PCI Express Cards
239
13.2
Before Maintaining a PCI Express Card
241
13.2.1
Types of maintenance
241
13.2.2
Maintenance flow
13.2.3
Precautions for replacement
13.2.4
Precautions for installation
13.2.5
Precautions for removal
241
242
242
242
13.3
Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used
13.4
Enabling the Removal of a PCI Express Card
13.5
13.6
13.7
13.4.1
Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)
13.4.2
Active/Hot maintenance (with DR)
13.4.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
13.4.4
System-stopped maintenance
Removing a PCI Express Card
243
246
246
250
252
252
253
13.5.1
Accessing a PCI Express card cassette
253
13.5.2
Removing a PCI Express card cassette
253
13.5.3
Removing a PCI Express card
Installing a PCI Express Card
255
258
13.6.1
Installing a PCI Express card
13.6.2
Installing a PCI Express card cassette
13.6.3
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
258
260
260
260
13.7.1
Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)
13.7.2
Active/Hot maintenance (with DR)
13.7.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
13.7.4
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 14
261
262
262
263
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
265
14.1
Location of the PSU Backplane Unit
14.2
Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
14.2.1
x
239
Types of maintenance
265
266
267
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
14.2.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
Maintenance flow
267
Enabling the Removal of the PSU Backplane Unit
14.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
14.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
14.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
268
269
269
Removing the PSU Backplane Unit
270
14.4.1
Accessing the PSU backplane unit
271
14.4.2
Removing the PSU backplane unit
273
Installing the PSU Backplane Unit
274
14.5.1
Installing the PSU backplane unit
14.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
276
Active/Cold maintenance
276
14.6.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
14.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
277
278
Maintaining the Operation Panel
281
15.1
Location of the Operation Panel
15.2
Before Maintaining the Operation Panel
15.3
15.4
15.5
274
275
14.6.1
Chapter 15
267
281
15.2.1
Types of maintenance
15.2.2
Maintenance flow
15.2.3
Precautions for replacement
282
282
283
283
Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel
15.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
15.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
15.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
284
Removing the Operation Panel
285
285
286
15.4.1
Accessing the operation panel
287
15.4.2
Removing the operation panel
289
Installing the Operation Panel
283
290
15.5.1
Installing the operation panel
15.5.2
Restoring the chassis
290
291
Contents
xi
15.6
Restoring the System
15.6.1
Active/Cold maintenance
15.6.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
15.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 16
292
293
294
Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box
16.1
Configuration of the Crossbar Units
297
16.2
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit
298
16.3
16.2.1
Types of maintenance
16.2.2
Maintenance flow
298
299
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit
16.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
16.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
16.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
16.4
Removing a Crossbar Unit
16.5
Installing a Crossbar Unit
16.6
Restoring the System
300
301
301
303
304
Active/Cold maintenance
304
16.6.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
16.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
305
305
Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box
17.1
Location of the XSCF Unit
17.2
Before Maintaining the XSCF Unit
17.3
299
299
16.6.1
Chapter 17
xii
292
307
17.2.1
Types of maintenance
17.2.2
Maintenance flow
308
308
309
Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Unit
17.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
17.3.2
Inactive/Hot maintenance
17.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
17.4
Removing the XSCF Unit
17.5
Installing the XSCF Unit
17.6
Restoring the System
309
310
310
311
312
314
315
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
307
297
17.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
17.6.2
Inactive/Hot maintenance
17.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 18
315
315
316
Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box
18.1
Configuration of the Power Supply Units
317
18.2
Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit
318
18.3
18.2.1
Types of maintenance
18.2.2
Maintenance flow
18.2.3
Precautions for replacement
318
319
319
Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit
18.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
18.3.2
Inactive/Hot maintenance
18.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
Removing a Power Supply Unit
18.5
Installing a Power Supply Unit
18.6
Restoring the System
320
323
324
18.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
324
18.6.2
Inactive/Hot maintenance
18.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
324
325
Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box
Configuration of the Fan Units
327
19.2
Before Maintaining a Fan Unit
328
19.4
321
322
19.1
19.3
319
320
18.4
Chapter 19
19.2.1
Types of maintenance
19.2.2
Maintenance flow
19.2.3
Precautions for replacement
329
329
19.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
19.3.2
Inactive/Hot maintenance
19.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
19.4.1
327
329
Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit
Removing a Fan Unit
317
329
330
330
331
332
Accessing a fan unit
332
Contents
xiii
19.4.2
19.5
19.6
Removing a fan unit
Installing a Fan Unit
333
19.5.1
Installing a fan unit
19.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
332
333
333
333
19.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
19.6.2
Inactive/Hot maintenance
19.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 20
334
334
334
Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of the Crossbar Box
20.1
Location of the XSCF Interface Unit
20.2
Before Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit
20.2.1
Types of maintenance
20.2.2
Maintenance flow
337
338
338
339
20.3
Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Interface Unit
20.4
Removing the XSCF Interface Unit
20.5
Installing the XSCF Interface Unit
20.6
Restoring the System
Chapter 21
339
340
342
342
Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
343
21.1
Location of the Crossbar Backplane Unit
21.2
Before Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit
21.2.1
Types of maintenance
21.2.2
Maintenance flow
343
344
344
345
21.3
Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar Backplane Unit
21.4
Removing the Crossbar Backplane Unit
21.5
Installing the Crossbar Backplane Unit
21.6
Restoring the System
Chapter 22
337
346
353
354
Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box
22.1
Configuration of the Fan Backplane
22.2
Before Maintaining the Fan Backplane
22.2.1
345
Types of maintenance
357
358
359
xiv Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
357
22.2.2
Maintenance flow
359
22.3
Enabling the Removal of the Fan Backplane
22.4
Removing the Fan Backplane
22.5
22.6
360
22.4.1
Accessing the fan backplane
360
22.4.2
Removing the fan backplane
361
Installing the Fan Backplane
365
22.5.1
Installing the fan backplane
22.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Restoring the System
Chapter 23
365
366
366
Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box
23.1
Location of the Operation Panel
23.2
Before Maintaining the Operation Panel
23.2.1
Types of maintenance
23.2.2
Maintenance flow
23.2.3
Precautions for replacement
368
368
369
369
Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel
23.4
Removing the Operation Panel
23.6
Accessing the operation panel
370
23.4.2
Removing the operation panel
373
Installing the Operation Panel
375
23.5.1
Installing the operation panel
23.5.2
Restoring the chassis
Chapter 24
369
370
23.4.1
Restoring the System
367
367
23.3
23.5
359
376
377
378
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
379
24.1
Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
24.2
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
24.3
24.2.1
Types of maintenance
24.2.2
Maintenance flow
24.2.3
Precautions for replacement
381
381
381
382
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
24.3.1
379
Inactive/Cold maintenance
382
382
Contents
xv
24.3.2
System-stopped maintenance
383
24.4
Removing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
24.5
Installing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
24.6
Restoring the System
385
386
24.6.1
Inactive/Cold maintenance
24.6.2
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 25
384
386
387
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
389
25.1
Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
25.2
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
25.3
25.2.1
Types of maintenance
25.2.2
Maintenance flow
25.2.3
Precautions for replacement
392
392
392
392
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
25.3.1
Inactive/Cold maintenance
25.3.2
System-stopped maintenance
393
393
25.4
Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
25.5
Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
25.6
Restoring the System
394
394
396
397
25.6.1
Inactive/Cold maintenance
25.6.2
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 26
397
398
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
401
26.1
Configuration of the Ports for the XSCF BB Control Cables
26.2
Before Maintaining an XSCF BB Control Cable
26.3
389
26.2.1
Types of maintenance
26.2.2
Maintenance flow
403
403
403
Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB Control Cable
26.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
404
26.3.2
Active/Cold maintenance
405
26.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
405
26.3.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
26.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
406
406
xvi Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
404
401
26.4
Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable
26.5
Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable
26.6
Restoring the System
409
410
26.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
26.6.2
Active/Cold maintenance
410
26.6.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
411
26.6.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
26.6.5
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 27
407
410
411
411
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables
413
27.1
Configuration of the XSCF DUAL Control Ports
27.2
Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
27.3
27.2.1
Types of maintenance
27.2.2
Maintenance flow
415
415
415
Enabling the Removal of an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
27.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
27.3.2
Active/Cold maintenance
417
27.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
417
27.3.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
27.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
418
418
Removing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
27.5
Installing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
27.6
Restoring the System
419
421
421
27.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
27.6.2
Active/Cold maintenance
422
27.6.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
422
27.6.4
Inactive/Cold maintenance
27.6.5
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 28
421
423
423
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
Configuration of the Cable Kit
28.1.1
416
416
27.4
28.1
413
425
425
Cables for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit
and terminal board
425
Contents
xvii
28.1.2
Cables for the connection between the terminal board and fan
backplane
28.1.3
28.2
427
Locations for the cable kit
428
Before Maintaining the Cable Kit
28.2.1
Types of maintenance
28.2.2
Maintenance flow
429
429
430
28.3
Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit
28.4
Removing the Cable Kit
28.4.1
430
431
Removing the cables for the connection between the crossbar
backplane unit and terminal board
28.4.2
Removing the cables for the connection between the terminal
board and fan backplane
28.5
Installing the Cable Kit
28.5.1
444
444
Installing a cable for the connection between the terminal board
and fan backplane
28.6
Restoring the System
Chapter 29
436
Installing a cable between the crossbar backplane unit and
terminal board
28.5.2
431
445
451
Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on
the Rack for Expanded Connection
453
29.1
Configuration of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
29.2
Before Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
29.3
29.2.1
Types of maintenance
29.2.2
Maintenance flow
29.2.3
Precautions for replacement
453
455
455
455
455
Enabling the Removal of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
29.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
456
29.3.2
System-stopped maintenance
456
29.4
Removing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
29.5
Installing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
29.6
Restoring the System
457
461
461
xviii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
456
29.6.1
Active/Cold maintenance
29.6.2
System-stopped maintenance
Appendix A
Component List
Appendix B
Component Specifications
B.1
CPU Memory Unit
B.2
Crossbar Unit
B.3
XSCF Unit
B.4
Power Supply Unit
B.5
Fan Unit
B.6
Internal Disk Drive
B.7
PCI Express Card
B.8
XSCF Interface Unit
B.9
Backplanes
B.10
463
469
470
471
471
472
472
473
476
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands
iostat(1M) Command
C.2
prtdiag(1M) Command
479
C.3
prtconf(1M) Command
482
C.4
netstat(1M) Command
485
C.5
ping(1M) Command
C.6
ps(1) Command
C.7
prstat(1M) Command
D.1
486
488
489
491
491
Wire connection chart for serial cable
D.2
USB Port
492
D.3
SAS Port
493
D.4
RESET Switch
Index
477
477
External Interface Specifications
Serial Port
D.1.1
467
467
C.1
Appendix D
462
468
Operation Panel
Appendix C
462
492
493
495
Contents
xix
xx
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
Preface
This document describes the maintenance procedure for Oracle or Fujitsu SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box. The maintenance work should be performed by
service engineers and/or field engineers.
Fujitsu M10 is sold as SPARC M10 Systems by Fujitsu in Japan.
Fujitsu M10 and SPARC M10 Systems are identical products.
The preface includes the following sections:
■
Audience
■
Related Documentation
■
Text Conventions
■
Notes on Safety
■
Syntax of the Command-Line Interface (CLI)
■
Document Feedback
Audience
This document is intended for service engineers and field engineers who perform
maintenance work on the system.
xxi
Related Documentation
All documents for your server are available online at the following locations.
Sun Oracle software-related documents (Oracle Solaris, etc.)
http://www.oracle.com/documentation/
■
■
Fujitsu documents
Japanese site
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/sparc/manual/
Global site
http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/server/sparc/downloads/manual/
The following table lists documents related to SPARC M10 Systems.
Documentation Related to SPARC M10 Systems (*1)
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Getting Started Guide (*2)
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Quick Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Important Legal and Safety Information (*2)
Software License Conditions for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Safety and Compliance Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Security Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems/SPARC Enterprise/PRIMEQUEST Common Installation Planning Manual
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide
Fujitsu M10-1/SPARC M10-1 Service Manual
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual
PCI Expansion Unit for Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Service Manual
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Domain Configuration Guide
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems XSCF Reference Manual
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Product Notes
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Glossary
*1
*2
The listed manuals are subject to change without notice.
Printed manuals are provided with the product.
xxii Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
Text Conventions
This manual uses the following fonts and symbols to express specific types of
information.
Font/Symbol
Meaning
Example
AaBbCc123
What you type, when contrasted with on-screen
computer output.
This font indicates an example of command input.
XSCF> adduser jsmith
AaBbCc123
The names of commands, files, and directories;
on-screen computer output.
This font indicates an example of command input
in the frame.
XSCF> showuser -P
User Name:
jsmith
Privileges:
useradm
auditadm
Italic
Indicates the name of a reference manual.
See the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems Installation Guide.
""
Indicates the names of chapters, sections, items,
buttons, or menus.
See "Chapter 2 Network Connection."
Command syntax in the text
While the XSCF commands have a section number of (8) or (1), it is omitted from the
text.
The Oracle Solaris commands have a section number such as (1M) in the text.
Each command has a section number in a command name to prompt users to refer to
it.
Notes on Safety
Read the following documents thoroughly before using or handling any SPARC M10
Systems.
■
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Important Legal and Safety Information
■
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Safety and Compliance Guide
Preface
xxiii
Syntax of the Command-Line Interface
(CLI)
The command syntax is as follows:
A variable that requires the input of a value must be put in Italics.
■
■
■
An optional element must be enclosed in [].
A group of options for an optional keyword must be enclosed in [] and delimited
by |.
Document Feedback
If you have any comments or requests regarding this document, please take a
moment to share it with us by indicating the manual code, manual title, and page,
and stating your points specifically through the following websites:
■
Japanese site
http://jp.fujitsu.com/platform/server/sparc/manual/
■
Global site
http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/computing/server/sparc/downloads/manual/
xxiv Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
Chapter 1
Before Starting Maintenance Work
This chapter describes the safety precautions that must be observed before starting
any maintenance work.
Note the meanings of each of the following symbols and labels to ensure that the
work is done correctly.
■
Warning/Caution Indications
1.1
■
Warning Labels
■
Labels/Tags
■
Safety Precautions
■
Notes Regarding Static Electricity
■
Other Precautions
■
Emergency Power Off
Warning/Caution Indications
This manual uses the following conventions to indicate warning and alert messages,
which are intended to prevent injury to the user and others as well as damage to
property.
Warning - "WARNING" indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or
serious personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly.
Caution - "CAUTION" indicates a potential hazard that could result in minor or
moderate personal injury if the user does not perform the procedure correctly. This
also indicates that damage to the unit or other property may occur if the user does
not perform the procedure correctly.
1
1.2
Warning Labels
Observe the warning labels (A in the figure) affixed on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
and the crossbar box during the maintenance work. The warning label on the
crossbar box also describes certification standards.
Caution - Never peel off the labels.
Figure 1-1
Location of warning labels (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
A
A
A
Figure 1-2
Location of warning labels (crossbar box)
A
1.3
Labels/Tags
This section explains labels and tags that are affixed on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
and the crossbar box.
Note - The contents of the labels and tags may differ from those that are actually affixed.
2
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
■
■
The system name plate label (A in the figure) describes the model number, serial
number, and version required for maintenance and management.
The standard label (B in the figure) describes the following certification standards.
The warning label on the crossbar box describes certification standards.
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
■
Safety: NRTL/C
■
Radio wave: VCCI-A, FCC-A, DOC-A, KCC, and C-Tick
■
Safety and radio wave: CE, BSMI, and GOST-R
Crossbar box
■
Safety: NRTL/C
■
Radio wave: VCCI-A, FCC-A, DOC-A, KCC, and C-Tick
■
Safety and radio wave: CE and CU
Figure 1-3
Location of the system name plate label and standard label (SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S)
B
A
Figure 1-4
Location of the system name plate label and warning label (crossbar
box)
A
B
Chapter 1
Before Starting Maintenance Work
3
■
The RFID tag carries an Asset ID. The RFID tag of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is
affixed on the front cover.
Figure 1-5
4
RFID tag (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 1-6
1.4
RFID tag (crossbar box)
Safety Precautions
Observe the following precautions to protect yourself when performing maintenance.
■
Observe all the precautions, warnings, and instructions described on the chassis.
■
■
Do not insert foreign objects into the openings in the chassis. Any such foreign
object could come into contact with high-voltage circuitry or could short circuit
the components, causing a fire or an electric shock.
Contact a service engineer to inspect the chassis.
Chapter 1
Before Starting Maintenance Work
5
Safety precautions on electricity
■
■
■
■
Confirm that the voltage and frequency of your input power supply match those
shown on the electric rating label affixed on the chassis.
Wear a wrist strap when handling a hard disk drive, CPU memory unit, or other
printed boards.
Use grounded power outlets.
Do not attempt to make any mechanical or electrical modifications. Fujitsu shall
not be responsible for the regulatory compliance of a chassis that has been modified.
Safety precautions on the racks
■
■
■
■
The racks should be fixed on the floor, ceiling, or the adjacent frame.
The racks may be supplied with a quakeresistant options kit. The use of the
quakeresistant options kit prevents the racks from falling over during installation
or maintenance service on the chassis.
Prior to installation or maintenance, a safety assessment should be conducted by a
service engineer in the following cases:
■
When the quakeresistant options kit is not supplied and the rack is not fixed on
the floor with bolts: Check for the safety such as whether the rack should not
fall over.
If multiple chassis are mounted in a rack, perform maintenance for each of the
chassis.
For details of the racks, see "Chapter 2 Planning and Preparing for System
Installation" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide.
1.5
Notes Regarding Static Electricity
Observe the precautions concerning the electrostatic discharge (ESD) as described in
Table 1-1 to ensure the safety of personnel and the system.
Table 1-1
6
ESD precautions
Item
Precaution
Wrist strap
Wear an antistatic wrist strap when handling printed boards.
ESD mat
An approved ESD mat provides protection from static damage
when used with a wrist strap. The mat also acts as a cushion to
protect the small parts that are attached to printed boards.
Antistatic bag/
ESD safe packaging box
After removing a printed board or component, place it in the
antistatic bag or ESD safe packaging box.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
How to use a wrist strap
Wear a wrist strap in such a way that the inner metal surface (A in the figure) of the
wrist strap band is in contact with your skin. Connect the clip (B in the figure)
directly to the chassis.
Caution - Do not connect the wrist strap clip to the ESD mat. By connecting the wrist
strap clip to the chassis, the operator and components have the same level of
potential, thus eliminating the danger of static damage.
Figure 1-7
Wrist strap connection destination
A
B
1.6
Other Precautions
■
■
Printed boards in the chassis can be easily damaged by static electricity. To
prevent damage to printed boards, wear a wrist strap and ground it to the chassis
prior to starting maintenance.
When mounting any component in the chassis, check the connectors on both of the
chassis and component beforehand to confirm that none of the pins are bent and
that all the pins are neatly arranged in lines. If a component is mounted with a
bent pin in a connector, the chassis or component may be damaged. Also, carefully
proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent.
Chapter 1
Before Starting Maintenance Work
7
■
If excessive force is applied to the CPU memory unit, the components mounted on
printed boards may be damaged. When handling the CPU memory unit, observe
the following precautions:
■
Hold the CPU memory unit by the metal frame.
■
■
■
■
■
■
1.7
When removing the CPU memory unit from the packaging, keep the CPU
memory unit horizontal until you lay it on the cushioned ESD mat.
Connectors and components on the CPU memory unit have thin pins that bend
easily. Therefore, do not place the CPU memory unit on a hard surface.
Be careful not to damage the small parts located on both sides of the CPU
memory unit.
The heat sinks can be damaged by incorrect handling. Do not touch the heat sinks
with your hands or other objects while replacing or removing CPU memory units.
If a heat sink is disconnected or broken, obtain a replacement CPU memory unit.
When storing or carrying a CPU memory unit, ensure that the heat sinks are
sufficiently protected.
When removing a cable such as the LAN cable, if you cannot reach the latch lock
of the connector, use a flat headed screwdriver etc. to push the latch and release
the cable. If you use force to remove the cable, the LAN port of the CPU memory
unit or the PCI Express (PCIe) cards may be damaged.
Do not use any power cord other than the specified one.
Emergency Power Off
This section explains the procedure for powering off the system in an emergency.
Caution - In an emergency (such as smoke or flames coming from the chassis),
immediately stop using the unit and turn off the power supply. Regardless of the
operation you are performing, give top priority to fire prevention.
1.
8
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 1-8
Removing the power cord (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Figure 1-9
Removing the power cord (crossbar box)
Chapter 1
Before Starting Maintenance Work
9
10
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 2
Understanding the System
Components
This chapter describes the components mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and
the crossbar box.
It is necessary to confirm and fully understand the configurations of the components
mounted in the chassis as well as the LED indications before starting any maintenance
work.
■
Identifying the Names and Locations of Components
■
Confirming the Functions of the Operation Panel
■
Checking the LED Indications
■
Confirming the Types of Cable
For the specifications of each component, see "Appendix B Component Specifications."
2.1
Identifying the Names and Locations of
Components
This section describes the names and locations of the components mounted in the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box.
Components that can be accessed from the front
You can access the fan unit and power supply unit only after removing the front
cover.
11
Figure 2-1
Locations of components that can be accessed from the front (SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S)
(1)
(3)
(2)
Location number
Component
1
Fan unit
2
Internal disk
3
Power supply unit
Figure 2-2
Location of a component that can be accessed from the front (crossbar
box)
(1)
12
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Location number
Component
1
Fan unit
Components that can be accessed from the rear
Figure 2-3
Locations of components that can be accessed from the rear (SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S)
(1)
(2)
Location number
Component
1
PCI-Express (PCIe) card cassette
2
Crossbar unit (Only for the SPARC M10-4S. The SPARC M10-4
incorporates three PCIe card cassettes.)
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
13
Figure 2-4
Locations of components that can be accessed from the rear (crossbar
box)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
Location number
Component
1
Power supply unit
2
XSCF unit
3
XSCF interface unit
4
Crossbar unit
Internal components
To access the internal components, remove the CPU memory unit from the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S, and the fan shelf from the crossbar box.
14
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 2-5
Locations of internal components (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
(3)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(5)
(4)
(6)
Location number
Component
1
CPU memory unit upper
2
CPU memory unit lower
3
Memory
4
PSU backplane unit
5
HDD backplane
6
Operation panel
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
15
Figure 2-6
Locations of internal components (crossbar box)
(1)
(2)
(3)
2.2
Location number
Component
1
Fan backplane
2
Crossbar backplane unit
3
Operation panel
Confirming the Functions of the
Operation Panel
This section describes the functions of the operation panels of the SPARC M10-4/
M10-4S and the crossbar box.
16
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
The operation panel provides the system's display and control functions. A field
engineer and the system administrator can specify the operation mode or control the
starting/stopping of the system while checking the system operation status by
referring to the LED indications.
Figure 2-7
Location of the operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
17
Figure 2-8
Location of the operation panel (crossbar box)
Figure 2-9
Appearance of operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar
box)
㩿㪈㪀
㩿㪉㪀
㩿㪊㪀
㩿㪋㪀
18
㩿㪌㪀
Location number
Component
1
POWER LED
2
XSCF STANDBY LED
㩿㪍㪀
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Location number
Component
3
CHECK LED
4
ID switch (SPARC M10-4S and crossbar box only)
5
Mode switch
6
Power switch
For a building block configuration, an operation panel is mounted in each chassis of
the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. However, the only operation panel on which
all of the LEDs and switches are enabled is that of the chassis housing the master
XSCF.
Table 2-1 shows the display and operation status of the operation panel.
Table 2-1
Display and operation status of operation panel
LEDs/switches on
operation panel
If the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box is acting
as the master XSCF
If the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box is acting
as an XSCF other than the master XSCF
POWER LED
Enabled (Displays the start or stop status of
the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box)
Enabled (Displays the start or stop status of
the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box)
XSCF STANDBY
LED
Enabled (Displays the XSCF status of the
system)
Enabled (Displays the XSCF status of the
SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box)
CHECK LED
Enabled (Displays an abnormal status of
the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box)
Enabled (Displays an abnormal status of
the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box)
ID switch
Enabled (Registration of ID number)
Enabled (Registration of ID number)
Mode switch (*)
Enabled (Mode operation of the system)
Disabled
Power switch
Enabled (Start/stop operation of the system)
Disabled
*: Set the same mode for the SPARC M10-4S systems and crossbar boxes with the master XSCF and XCCF in the standby state. If the
settings are different, an asterisk (*) is displayed beside the components in the output of the showhardconf or showstatus command.
2.2.1
Display function of the operation panel
The operation panel has three LED indicators to implement its display function. The
LED indicators indicate the following. For details, see "2.3.1 Operation panel LEDs."
■
General system status
■
System error warning
■
System error location
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
19
Figure 2-10
LEDs on operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box)
㩿㪈㪀
㩿㪉㪀
㩿㪊㪀
2.2.2
Location number
Component
1
POWER LED
2
XSCF STANDBY LED
3
CHECK LED
Control function of the operation panel
The operation panel has the following switches to implement its control function:
ID switch
Identifies the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box.
■
■
■
Mode switch (slide switch)
Specifies the operation mode.
Power switch
Controls start/stop of the system.
Figure 2-11
㩿㪈㪀
20
Operation panel switches
㩿㪉㪀
㩿㪊㪀
Location number
Component
1
ID switch (SPARC M10-4S and crossbar box only)
2
Mode switch
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Location number
Component
3
Power switch
Use the ID switch to set the ID number of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box. Set
#0 to #15 for the SPARC M10-4S and #80 to #83 for the crossbar box. Table 2-2
describes how to operate the ID switch.
Table 2-2
How to operate the ID switch
Operation
Description
Pressing the + side.
The ID number increases by 1.
Pressing the - side
The ID number decreases by 1.
Use the mode switch to set the operation mode for the system. The Locked and
Service operation modes can be switched by sliding the mode switch.
Table 2-3 describes the difference between the modes.
Table 2-3
Icon
Functions of the mode switch
Name
Description
Locked mode
This mode is used for normal operation.
- The power switch can be used to start the system but not to
stop it.
Service mode
This mode is used for maintenance.
- The power switch cannot be used to start the system but can be
used to stop it.
- Place the system in Service mode to perform maintenance
work with the system stopped.
Use the power switch to start or stop the system. The system starts/stops differently
depending on how the power switch is pressed.
Table 2-4 describes how system start/stop varies depending on how the power switch
is pressed.
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
21
Table 2-4
Icon
Functions of the power switch
Operation
Description
Brief press
(For 1 second or
more and less than 4
seconds)
If the system has been
started in Service mode (*):
Operation is ignored.
If the system is stopped in
Service mode:
Operation is ignored.
If the system has been
started in Locked mode (*):
Operation is ignored.
If the system is stopped in
Locked mode:
Starts the system.
At this time, if a wait time for the air conditioning
facilities or a warm-up time is set on the XSCF,
the processing for waiting for the power-on of the
air conditioning facilities and the completion of
warm-up is omitted.
If the system has been
started in Service mode (*):
Perform the system shutdown process to stop the
system.
If the system startup
process is in progress in
Service mode:
Cancels the system startup process and then
stops the system.
If the system stop process
is in progress in Service
mode:
Continues the system stop process.
If the system is stopped in
Service mode:
Operation is ignored.
Even a long press does not start the system.
If the system is stopped in
Locked mode:
Starts the system.
If a wait time for the air conditioning facilities or
a warm-up time is set on the XSCF, the
processing for waiting for the power-on of the air
conditioning facilities and the completion of
warm-up is omitted.
If the system is not
stopped in Locked mode:
Operation is ignored.
Long press
(For 4 seconds or
more)
*: If the system has been started, it means that at least one physical partition has been powered on.
Table 2-5 describes the functions of the mode switch.
Table 2-5
Functions of the mode switch
Function
Starting/Stopping the system
by the power switch
22
Mode switch
Locked
Service
Only system startup is enabled.
A long press
shuts down the
system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 2-5
Functions of the mode switch (continued)
Function
Mode switch
Inhibition of break signal
reception
2.3
Locked
Service
Enabled. Using the setpparmode
command, it is possible to specify
whether break signal reception is
allowed or inhibited for each physical
partition.
Disabled
Checking the LED Indications
This section describes the statuses of the LEDs mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M104S and the crossbar box.
LEDs are mounted on the operation panel on the front of the chassis, on the rear
panel of the chassis, and on each component that can be maintained. If an error
occurs, the LED indication enables you to determine which system requires
maintenance.
2.3.1
Operation panel LEDs
The three LEDs on the operation panel indicate the operation status of the overall
system. In addition, the LEDs enable you to check the system status by their
combination of being on, blinking, or off.
Table 2-6 lists the system operation status indicated by the LEDs, while Table 2-7 lists
the system status indicated by the combination of LEDs.
Table 2-6
System operation status indicated by LEDs
Icon
Name
Color
Description
POWER
Green
Indicates the startup or stop status of the system for
each chassis.
●
On: System is started.
●
Off: System is stopped.
●
Blinking (*): System stop process is in progress.
XSCF
STANDBY
Green
Indicates the status of the XSCF for the entire system or
for each chassis.
●
On: XSCF is functioning normally.
●
Off: XSCF is stopped.
●
Blinking (*): System is being initialized after
power-on.
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
23
Table 2-6
System operation status indicated by LEDs (continue d)
Icon
Name
Color
Description
CHECK
Amber
Indicates the system operation status for each chassis.
●
On: An error that prevents startup was detected.
●
Off: Normal, or the power is disconnected or not
being supplied.
●
Blinking (*): Indicates that the chassis requires
maintenance (this function is also referred to as the
"locator").
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
Table 2-7
System status indicated by combination of LEDs
LED state
Description
POWER
XSCF
STANDBY
CHECK
Off
Off
Off
Power is disconnected.
Off
Off
On
Power has just been turned on.
Off
Blinking (*)
Off
The XSCF is being initialized.
Off
Off
On
The XSCF has detected an error.
Off
On
Off
The XSCF is in the standby state.
The system is waiting for power-on of the air
conditioning facilities (in the data center).
On
On
Off
Warm-up standby processing is in progress. After
the end of this processing, the system starts up.
System startup processing is in progress.
The system is operating.
Blinking (*)
On
Off
System stop processing is in progress. After the
end of processing, the fan unit stops.
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
2.3.2
LEDs on the rear panel (System locator)
The field engineer or system administrator can identify the chassis requiring
maintenance by using the CHECK LED (A in the figure) on the rear panel. The
CHECK LED on the rear panel is referred to as the system locator, and has the same
function as the CHECK LED on the operation panel.
24
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 2-12
Location of system locator (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
A
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
25
Figure 2-13
Location of system locator (crossbar box)
A
Table 2-8
Icon
Status of the system locator
Name
Color
Description
CHECK
Amber
Indicates the system operation status for each chassis.
●
On: An error that prevents startup was detected.
●
Off: Normal, or the power is disconnected or not being
supplied.
●
Blinking (*): Indicates that the chassis requires
maintenance (this function is also referred to as the
"locator").
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
2.3.3
LEDs on each component
Each component of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box has an LED
mounted. These LEDs light to indicate that a component requires maintenance if that
component experiences a fault. Start maintenance work after checking the LED status.
The LEDs on each component and their statuses are as follows:
26
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 2-9
LEDs on the XSCF or XSCF unit and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and
crossbar box)
Name
Color
Status
Description
READY
Green
On
Indicates that the component is operating.
The component cannot be released and
removed from the system.
Blinking (*)
Indicates that the component is currently
being mounted on the system or being
disconnected from the system.
Off
Indicates that the component is disconnected
from the system. Indicates that the
component can be removed and replaced.
On
Indicates that an error has occurred.
Blinking (*)
Indicates that the component requires
maintenance (This function is also referred to
as the "locator").
Off
Indicates the normal state.
On
Master chassis
Off
Slave chassis
CHECK
MASTER
Table 2-10
Amber
Green
LEDs on the XSCF-LAN port and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and
crossbar box)
Name
Color
Status
Description
ACT
Green
On
Indicates that communication is being
performed.
Off
Indicates that communication is not being
performed.
Amber
On
Indicates that the communication speed is 1
Gbps.
Green
Blinking (*)
Indicates that the communication speed is
100 Mbps.
Off
Indicates that the communication speed is 10
Mbps.
LINK SPEED
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
Table 2-11
LED on the fan unit and its status (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and crossbar box)
Name
Color
Status
Description
CHECK
Amber
On
Indicates that an error has occurred.
Blinking (*)
Indicates that the component requires
maintenance (This function is also referred to
as the "locator").
Off
Indicates the normal state.
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
27
Table 2-12
Name
CHECK
LED on the power supply unit and its status (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and
crossbar box)
Color
Status
Description
Green
On
Indicates that the input power is turned on
and power is being supplied normally.
Blinking (*)
Indicates that the input power is being
disconnected.
On
Indicates that an error has occurred.
Indicates that the input power to this power
supply unit is turned off in redundant
operation.
Blinking (*)
Indicates a warning (An error has occurred
but this power supply unit is operating).
Off
Indicates that power is not being supplied.
Amber
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
Table 2-13
LEDs on the PCIe card slot and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Name
Color
Status
Description
POWER
Green
On
Indicates that power is being supplied.
Off
Indicates that power is not being supplied.
On
Indicates that an error has occurred.
Blinking (*)
Indicates that the component requires
maintenance (This function is also referred to
as the "locator").
Off
Indicates the normal state.
ATTENTION
Amber
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
Table 2-14
LEDs on the internal disk and their statuses (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Name
Color
Status
Description
READY
Green
Blinking
Indicates that the disk is being accessed. This
LED is normally on, but it blinks while the
disk is being accessed.
While the LED is blinking, maintenance work
such as the removal of the disk cannot be
performed.
Off
Indicates that maintenance work such as the
removal of the disk can be performed.
On
Indicates that an error has occurred.
Blinking (*)
Indicates that the component requires
maintenance (This function is also referred to
as the "locator").
Off
Indicates the normal state.
CHECK
Amber
* The blink interval is 1 second (1 Hz).
28
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
2.4
Confirming the Types of Cable
This section describes the types of the cables that are connected to the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, as well as the locations of the cable ports.
The types and number of the cables to be used vary depending on the configuration.
2.4.1
Types of cable
In a building block configuration, the following cables are used for making a
connection between the SPARC M10-4S systems and between the SPARC M10-4S
and the crossbar box:
■
Crossbar cable (electrical)
This is used to connect the SPARC M10-4S systems in a building block configuration
without the crossbar box.
■
■
Crossbar cable (optical)
This is used to connect the SPARC M10-4S with the crossbar box in a building
block configuration with the crossbar box.
XSCF BB control cable
This is used to connect the XSCFs mounted in the SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box
chassis.
An XSCF mounted in a chassis becomes the master XSCF and monitors or controls
the entire system. XSCFs other than the master XSCF act as slaves and monitor or
control each chassis.
■
XSCF DUAL control cable
This is used to connect the master XSCF to a standby XSCF and duplicate XSCF.
One of the slave XSCFs functions as the standby XSCF. If an abnormality occurs
with the master XSCF, the standby XSCF becomes the master XSCF and continues
the monitoring or control of the system.
Each table has a tag that is used for maintenance recording and management.
2.4.2
Cable connection ports
Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15 show the locations of the cable connection ports of the
SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively. See the following chapters for the
procedures for maintaining the cables:
■
Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
■
Chapter 25
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
■
Chapter 26
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
■
Chapter 27
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
29
Figure 2-14
Locations of cable connection ports (SPARC M10-4S)
(2)
(1)
(3)
30
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 2-15
Locations of cable connection ports (crossbar box)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Location number
Connection port
1
XSCF DUAL control port
2
XSCF BB control port
3
Crossbar cable connection port
Chapter 2
Understanding the System Components
31
32
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how to determine and confirm the cause if an error occurs.
■
Suspected Failure Conditions
3.1
■
Determining the Causes of Individual Failures
■
Identifying a Failure
■
Downloading Error Log Information
Suspected Failure Conditions
This section explains suspected failure conditions. Use the flow to determine the
cause of a failure and identify the failure location in the following cases. For details
on the flow for determining the cause of a failure, see "3.2 Determining the Causes
of Individual Failures."
■
When the CHECK LED is on
■
■
■
3.2
When an error message is displayed on the console
When an error is displayed as a result of executing a command for checking the
status
When an error is displayed in the error log
Determining the Causes of Individual
Failures
This section explains the flow for determining the causes of failures. This flow is also
applied to failures of the PCI expansion unit.
33
Figure 3-1
Troubleshooting flow
Start
Is the LED on the power
supply unit off?
YES
Check the connection of the power
supply unit and power cords.
NO
Was e-mail sent by the
XSCF mail function?
YES
NO
Confirm that an error message is
displayed on the OS and XSCF
consoles.
Execute showlogs on XSCF to
display failure information.
Check /var/adm/messages on
Oracle Solaris.
Write down the displayed failure
information.
Contact our service engineer.
End
3.3
Identifying a Failure
This section explains the method for identifying a failure. Use the flow described in
"3.2 Determining the Causes of Individual Failures" to determine the appropriate
way of checking for a failure.
34
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
3.3.1
Checking the LED indications
Check the LEDs on the operation panel, rear panel, and on each component to
identify which component requires maintenance. Check the status of a component
from its LED before starting any maintenance work on that component.
■
Operation panel LEDs
You can check the status of the system by checking the LEDs on the operation
panel. For details, see "2.3.1 Operation panel LEDs."
■
■
LEDs on the rear panel
You can check the status of the system by noting the CHECK LED on the rear
panel of the chassis, which has the same function as the CHECK LED on the
operation panel. For details, see "2.3.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System locator)."
LED on each component
You can determine the location of an error by checking the LED on the component
that incorporates the failed hardware if an error occurs in the hardware within the
chassis. For details, see "2.3.3 LEDs on each component."
Note that some components such as memory are not provided with LEDs. To
check the status of a component that does not have an LED, execute XSCF shell
commands such as the showhardconf command from the maintenance terminal.
For details, see "3.3.3 Checking the status of a component."
3.3.2
Checking error messages
Display error messages to check the log information and obtain an error overview.
You can use either of the following two methods to check the error messages:
■
Checking error log information using the XSCF shell
For details, see "12.1 Checking a Log Saved by the XSCF" in the Fujitsu M10/
SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
■
3.3.3
Checking messages on Oracle Solaris
For details, see "12.2 Checking Warning and Notification Messages" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
Checking the status of a component
Execute the XSCF firmware commands to check the system hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
showhardconf command
Execute the showhardconf command to check the information for a list of components.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the list of components.
A failed component is indicated by an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the line.
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
35
XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081229003; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Running;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2050h; Serial:2081229003;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:320 GB;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------PCI#0 Status:Normal; Name_Property:pci;
+ Vendor-ID:108e; Device-ID:9020;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:0000; Subsystem-ID:0000;
+ Model:;
+ Connection:7001;
*
PCIBOX#7001; Status:Faulted; Ver:1110h; Serial:2121237001;
+ FRU-Part-Number:;
IOB Status:Normal; Serial:PP123403JE ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B66X 008AG
;
LINKBOARD Status:Normal; Serial:PP1234026P ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B60X 001AA
;
PCI#1 Name_Property:ethernet;
+ Vendor-ID:1077; Device-ID:8000;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:1077; Subsystem-ID:017e;
+ Model:;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
showstatus command
Execute the showstatus command to check the status of the components.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the showstatus command to check the status.
A failed component is indicated by an asterisk (*) at the beginning of the line.
XSCF> showstatus
MBU Status:Normal;
*
MEM#0A Status:Faulted;
The status of the component is displayed following "Status:".
Table 3-1 describes the status of the components.
Table 3-1
36
Status of components
Display
Description
Normal
The unit is in the normal state.
Faulted
The unit is faulty and is not operating.
Degraded
A part of the unit has failed or degraded, but the unit is running.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 3-1
3.3.4
Status of components (continue d)
Display
Description
Deconfigured
Due to the failure or degradation of another unit, the target unit and
components of its underlying layer has been degraded, though there
is no problem in them.
Maintenance
Maintenance is being performed. The replacefru, addfru, or initbb
command is being executed.
Checking the status of a PCI expansion unit
If a PCI expansion unit is connected, execute the ioxadm command from the XSCF
shell to check the status of the PCI expansion unit.
ioxadm command
Execute the ioxadm command to check the environmental conditions (temperature,
voltage, etc.) or LED indications for the PCI expansion unit.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the ioxadm command to check the environmental conditions of the
specified PCI expansion unit.
To specify a PCI expansion unit, enter the serial number of the PCI expansion
unit after determining it by executing the ioxadm list command.
The following example shows the environmental conditions for the PCIBOX#2008
"2008" are the last four digits of the serial number of the PCI expansion unit.
XSCF> ioxadm env -te PCIBOX#2008
Location
Sensor
PCIBOX#2008
AIRFLOW
PCIBOX#2008
P_CONSUMPTION
PCIBOX#2008/PSU#0
FAN
PCIBOX#2008/PSU#1
FAN
PCIBOX#2008/FAN#0
FAN
PCIBOX#2008/FAN#1
FAN
PCIBOX#2008/FAN#2
FAN
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
T_INTAKE
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
T_PART_NO0
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
T_PART_NO1
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
T_PART_NO2
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
V_12_0V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
V_3_3_NO0
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
V_3_3_NO1
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
V_3_3_NO2
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
V_3_3_NO3
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
V_1_8V
PCIBOX#2008/IOBT
V_0_9V
Value Resolution Units
180.000
0.000 CHM
68.000
0.000 W
3936.000
0.000 RPM
3584.000
0.000 RPM
3374.000
0.000 RPM
3374.000
0.000 RPM
3374.000
0.000 RPM
26.000
0.000 C
31.500
0.000 C
30.750
0.000 C
31.500
0.000 C
12.069
0.000 V
3.293
0.000 V
3.295
0.000 V
3.291
0.000 V
3.300
0.000 V
1.804
0.000 V
0.900
0.000 V
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
37
3.3.5
Checking log information
Execute the showlogs command to check the error log information.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the showlogs command to check the log information.
The log information is listed in the order of date, with the oldest appearing first.
The following example shows that an Alarm status occurred in PSU#1 and
PSU#2 at 12:45:31 on Oct 20, the Alarm status changed to a Warning status at
15:45:31 on the same day, and then the Alarm status further expanded to PSU#1,
PSU#2, and PSU#3 at 17:45:31 on the same day.
XSCF> showlogs error
Date: Oct 20 12:45:31 JST 2012
Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344
Status: Alarm
Occurred: Oct 20 12:45:31.000 JST 2012
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Date: Oct 20 15:45:31 JST 2012
Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344
Status: Warning
Occurred: Oct 20 15:45:31.000 JST 2012
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Date: Oct 20 17:45:31 JST 2012
Code: 00112233-445566778899aabbcc-8899aabbcceeff0011223344
Status: Alarm
Occurred: Oct 20 17:45:31.000 JST 2012
FRU: PSU#1,PSU#2, PSU#3,*
Msg: ACFAIL occurred (ACS=3)(FEP type = A1)
Table 3-2 shows what log information each operand of the showlogs command can
display.
Table 3-2
38
Operands of the showlogs command and the log to be displayed
Operand
Description
error
Lists the error log.
event
Lists the event log.
power
Lists the power log.
env
Lists the temperature history.
monitor
Lists the monitoring message log.
console
Lists the console message log.
ipl
Lists the IPL message log.
panic
Lists the panic message log.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
3.3.6
Checking the messages output by the predictive
self-repairing tool
Check the messages output from the Oracle Solaris Fault Manager predictive
self-repairing tool, running on Oracle Solaris. Oracle Solaris Fault Manager has the
following functions:
■
Receives telemetry information about errors.
■
Performs troubleshooting
■
Disables the components that have experienced errors.
■
Turns on the LED of a component that has experienced an error and displays the
details in the system console message.
Table 3-3 lists typical messages that are generated if an error occurs. These messages
indicate that the fault has already been diagnosed. If there are corrective actions that
can be taken by the system, they have already been taken. In addition, if the system is
running, corrective actions continue to be applied.
Messages are displayed on the console and are recorded in the /var/adm/messages
file.
Table 3-3
Predictive self-repairing messages
Output Displayed
Description
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 EVENT-TIME：Tue
Nov 1 16：30：20 PST 2005
EVENT-TIME: Time stamp for the
diagnosis
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 PLATFORM：
ORCL,SPARC64-X, CSN：-,HOSTNAME：dt88-292
PLATFORM: Description of the
chassis in which the error occurred
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 SOURCE：eft, REV：1.13
SOURCE: Information regarding
the diagnosis engine used to
identify the error
Nov 1 16:30:20 dt88-292 EVENT-ID:
afc7e660-d609-4b2f-86b8-ae7c6b8d50c4
EVENT-ID: Universally unique
event ID for this error
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 DESC：
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 A problem was detected in
the PCI Express subsystem
DESC: Basic description of the error
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 Refer to http：//support.
oracle.com/msg/SUN4-8000-0Y for more information.
Website: Where to find specific
information and countermeasures
for this error
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 AUTO-RESPONSE：
One or more device instances may be disabled.
AUTO-RESPONSE: What the
system has done (if anything) to
alleviate any subsequent problems
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 IMPACT：Loss of services
provided by the device instances associated with this
fault.
IMPACT: Description of the
assumed impact of the failure
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
39
Table 3-3
3.3.7
Predictive self-repairing messages (continued)
Output Displayed
Description
Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 REC-ACTION：
Schedule a repair procedure to replace the affected
device.Use Nov 1 16：30：20 dt88-292 fmdump -v –u
EVENT_ID to identify the device or contact Sun for
support.
REC-ACTION: Brief description of
the corrective action the system
administrator should apply
Identifying the location of the chassis requiring
maintenance
Execute the setlocator command to identify the location of the chassis requiring
maintenance by causing the CHECK LED on the operation panel and the CHECK
LED (locator) on the rear panel to blink.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the setlocator command to blink the CHECK LED of the chassis
requiring maintenance, and determine its location.
The CHECK LEDs on the operation and rear panels blink.
An execution example in which the chassis requiring maintenance is the master
chassis is shown below. When specifying a different chassis such as BB#01, set
"setlocator -b 1 blink."
XSCF> setlocator -b 1 blink
For details on where to find and how to check the CHECK LEDs, see "2.3
Checking the LED Indications."
3.4
Downloading Error Log Information
This section describes the operation for downloading error log information.
To download error log information, use the XSCF log fetch function. The XSCF unit
has a maintenance USB port so that maintenance information such as error logs can
be obtained easily.
For details, see "12.1.15 Saving a log to a file with snapshot" and "12.1.16 Saving a
log to a local USB device" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation
and Administration Guide.
40
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 4
Preparing for Maintenance
This chapter describes the preparations that must be completed prior to performing
any maintenance as well as the types of maintenance.
■
Preparing Tools Required for Maintenance
4.1
■
Confirming the System Configuration
■
Understanding Types of Maintenance
Preparing Tools Required for
Maintenance
This section explains tools required for maintenance. Table 4-1 lists the tools required
for maintenance on a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU).
Table 4-1
4.2
Maintenance tools
Item
Use
1
Phillips screwdriver (No.2)
Removing or replacing screws
2
Flathead screwdriver (small)
Removing or replacing screws
3
Wrist strap
For grounding static
4
ESD mat
For grounding static
Confirming the System Configuration
This section explains how to check the hardware and software configurations.
After completing any maintenance, it is necessary to confirm that the the system
configuration is the same as that before starting the work. If an error occurs in the
41
system, record the system configuration and the states of the components before
starting maintenance. Then, confirm that the system configuration is the same after
maintenance as it was before.
4.2.1
Confirming the hardware configuration
Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the configuration and status of the
components mounted in the chassis. Before performing any maintenance work, check
and record the hardware configuration of the chassis.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the hardware configuration
information.
XSCF> showhardconf
The following information is displayed:
Current configuration and status
■
4.2.2
■
Number of mounted Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
■
Status of the unit in which a physical partition error or degradation occurred
■
Information on the PCI expansion unit
■
Name properties of the PCI Express (PCIe) card
Confirming the software and firmware
configurations
The software and firmware configurations and versions affect the operation of the
system. To change the configuration or investigate a problem, check the latest state
and check for any problems in the software.
Confirming the software configuration
Use Oracle Solaris commands to check the software configuration.
If you are logged in to the XSCF console, switch to the control domain console by
executing the console command beforehand.
Table 4-2 lists the commands used for checking the software configuration.
Table 4-2
42
Commands for checking the software configuration
Command
Description
pkg(1) (Oracle Solaris 11)
showrev(1M) (Oracle Solaris 10)
Displays Oracle Solaris correction information
and version.
ldm(1M)
Displays logical domain configuration information.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
1.
Log in to the control domain console of the physical partition where the
component to be maintained is mounted.
For information on logging in to the control domain console, see "8.2 Switching
to the Control Domain Console from the XSCF Shell" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC
M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
2.
Execute the pkg(1) command to display Oracle Solaris correction information
and version.
- For Oracle Solaris 11, execute the pkg(1) command.
# pkg info entire
Name: entire
Summary: entire incorporation including Support Repository Update
(Oracle Solaris 11.1.12.5.0).
- For Oracle Solaris 10, execute the showrev(1M) command.
# showrev -p
For the Oracle VM Server for SPARC version, execute the ldm(1M) command.
# ldm -V
Logical Domains Manager (v 3.1)
Hypervisor control protocol v 1.9
Using Hypervisor MD v 1.3
Confirming the firmware configuration
Use XSCF shell commands to check the firmware configuration.
Table 4-3 lists the commands for checking the firmware configuration.
Table 4-3
Commands for checking the firmware configuration
Command
Description
version
Displays the current firmware version information.
showhardconf
Displays information on components mounted in the chassis.
showstatus
Displays the status of a component. Of the FRUs comprising the
system, this command displays information on a unit or
component that is faulty or degraded.
showboards
Displays information on a physical system board (PSB). Displays
information on a physical system board that belongs to the
specified physical partition and information on all the physical
system boards that are mounted.
showpcl
Displays the configuration information for a physical partition
(hardware resource information).
showfru
Displays the setting information for a device.
Chapter 4
Preparing for Maintenance
43
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the version command to determine the firmware version information.
In the following example, "-c xcp" is entered to determine the overall XCP version.
XSCF> version -c xcp
4.3
Understanding Types of Maintenance
This section explains the types of maintenance.
The single-chassis configuration and building block configuration denote the
following system configurations.
Table 4-4
System configuration
Configuration
Description
Single-chassis configuration
Configuration in which a single SPARC M10-4 is used
Building block configuration
Configuration in which 2 or more SPARC M10-4S's are
combined and used
There are the following five types of maintenance.
Active/hot maintenance
Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition remains turned on
and the input power to the chassis in which the target Field Replaceable Unit
(FRU) is mounted is on (power cord is connected). Active/hot maintenance can be
performed only on FRUs that have a redundant configuration or which support
PCI hot plugging (PHP).
■
44
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 4-1
Active/hot maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance)
Physical partition (active)
BB#0
Physical partition (active)
XBBOX
Hot
Hot
Hot
BB#1
Hot
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (active)
Physical partition (active)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
Figure 4-2
Active/hot maintenance (for crossbar box maintenance)
Physical partition (active)
BB#0
Physical partition (active)
XBBOX
BB#1
Hot
Physical partition (active)
BB#3
Hot
Hot
■
BB#3
Hot
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (active)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
Active/cold maintenance
Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition to which the
maintenance-target FRU belongs remains turned on but the input power to the
chassis in which the target FRU is mounted is off (power cord is disconnected). It
is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring
maintenance from the physical partition. For a single-chassis configuration, since
the chassis cannot be disconnected with DR, active/cold maintenance cannot be
performed.
Chapter 4
Preparing for Maintenance
45
Figure 4-3
Active/cold maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance)
Physical partition (active)
BB#0
Physical partition (active)
XBBOX
Cold
BB#3
Hot
Hot
BB#1
Hot
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (active)
Physical partition (active)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
Figure 4-4
Active/cold maintenance (for dedicated power distribution unit
maintenance)
Physical partition (active)
BB#0
Physical partition (active)
PDU
Hot
BB#2
Hot
Cold
BB#1
Physical partition (active)
Hot
BB#3
PDU
Hot
XBBOX
Hot
Hot
■
46
BB#4
Hot
Inactive/hot maintenance
Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition to which the
maintenance-target FRU belongs is powered off but the input power to the chassis
in which the target FRU is mounted is on (power cord is connected).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 4-5
Inactive/hot maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance)
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#0
Physical partition (active)
XBBOX
Hot
Hot
Hot
BB#1
Hot
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (active)
Physical partition (active)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
Figure 4-6
Inactive/hot maintenance (for crossbar box maintenance)
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#0
Physical partition (active)
XBBOX
BB#1
Hot
Physical partition (active)
BB#3
Hot
Hot
■
BB#3
Hot
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (active)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
Inactive/cold maintenance
Maintenance work is performed while the physical partition to which the
maintenance-target FRU belongs is powered off and the input power to the chassis
in which the target FRU is mounted is off (power cord is disconnected).
Chapter 4
Preparing for Maintenance
47
Figure 4-7
Inactive/cold maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance)
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#0
Physical partition (active)
XBBOX
Cold
Hot
Hot
BB#1
Hot
Physical partition (active)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
System-stopped maintenance
Maintenance work is performed while all the physical partitions are powered off
and input power to the chassis in which the target FRU is mounted is off (power
cord is disconnected).
Figure 4-8
System-stopped maintenance (for SPARC M10-4S maintenance)
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#0
Physical partition (stopped)
XBBOX
BB#1
Hot
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#3
Hot
Cold
48
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (active)
■
BB#3
Hot
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 4-9
System-stopped maintenance (for crossbar box maintenance)
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#0
Physical partition (stopped)
XBBOX
Hot
BB#3
Hot
Cold
BB#1
Hot
BB#4
Hot
Physical partition (stopped)
Physical partition (stopped)
BB#2
BB#5
Hot
Hot
Figure 4-10
System-stopped maintenance (for dedicated power distribution unit
maintenance)
Physical partition (stopped)
Physical partition (stopped)
PDU
BB#0
BB#2
Hot
Hot
Cold
BB#1
Physical partition (stopped)
Hot
BB#3
PDU
Hot
XBBOX
BB#4
Hot
Hot
Hot
The following describes the types of maintenance for FRUs.
Table 4-5
Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4
Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Reference
CPU memory unit
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
7
Chapter 4
Preparing for Maintenance
49
Table 4-5
Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4 (continued)
Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Reference
Memory
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
8
Power supply unit
Supported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
10
Fan unit
Supported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
11
Internal disk
Supported
(*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
12
PCIe card (*3)
-
-
-
-
-
Chapter
13
PSU backplane unit
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
14
Operation panel
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
15
*1:
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see the procedure for system-stopped
maintenance.
*2: Supported only for internal disks of devices other than boot devices. If, however, the boot device has a redundant configuration
(RAID configuration), active/hot maintenance is supported.
*3: The types of maintenance for PCIe cards are different from those of other FRUs. For details, see Table 13-1.
Table 4-6
Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4S
Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Reference
CPU memory unit
Unsupported
Supported
(*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
7
Memory
Unsupported
Supported
(*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
8
Crossbar unit
Unsupported
Supported
(*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
9
Power supply unit
Supported
(*3)
Supported
(*2)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
10
Fan unit
Supported
Supported
(*2)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
11
Internal disk
Supported
(*4)
Supported
(*2)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
12
PCIe card (*5)
-
-
-
-
-
Chapter
13
PSU backplane unit
Unsupported
Supported
(*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
14
50
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 4-6
Types of maintenance for SPARC M10-4S (continued)
Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Reference
Operation panel
Unsupported
Supported
(*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
15
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration.
Supported only for internal disks of devices other than boot devices. If, however, the boot device has a redundant configuration
(RAID configuration), active/hot maintenance is supported.
The types of maintenance for PCIe cards are different from those of other FRUs. For details, see Table 13-1.
Table 4-7
Types of maintenance for crossbar box
Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Reference
Crossbar unit
Unsupported
Supported
(*1)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
16
XSCF unit
Supported
(*4)
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
17
Power supply unit
Supported
(*5)
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
18
Fan unit
Supported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
19
XSCF interface unit
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
20
Crossbar backplane
unit
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
21
Fan backplane
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
22
Operation panel
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
23
*1: If any physical partition mounted on two or more chassis is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
*2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
*3: All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
*4: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If the XSCF is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a
standby XSCF.
*5: Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration.
Table 4-8
Types of maintenance for cables and dedicated power distribution unit
Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Reference
Crossbar cable
(electrical)
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
24
Crossbar cable
(optical)
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
25
Chapter 4
Preparing for Maintenance
51
Table 4-8
Types of maintenance for cables and dedicated power distribution unit (continued)
Supported: Maintenance can be performed / Unsupported: Maintenance cannot be performed
FRU
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Reference
XSCF BB control
cable
Supported
(*1)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
26
XSCF DUAL control
cable
Supported
(*1)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Chapter
27
Cable kit
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
(*3)
Chapter
28
Dedicated power
distribution unit
Unsupported
Supported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Chapter
29
*1:
The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If the XSCF is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a
standby XSCF.
*2: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
*3: All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
52
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for
Enabling Maintenance
This chapter describes the preparations that must be completed before you physically
remove a component. See this chapter, as required, when performing the maintenance
work on each component described in Chapter 7 onwards.
■
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru Command
■
Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition
■
Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance
■
Stopping the Entire System
■
Accessing Components
Caution - Do not operate a target Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) while OpenBoot
PROM is running (the ok prompt is displayed). After powering off the physical
partition or starting Oracle Solaris, operate the target FRU.
5.1
Releasing an FRU from the System
with the replacefru Command
This section describes the procedure for releasing an FRU requiring maintenance
from the system. The following FRUs can be the target of maintenance:
■
Power supply units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box
■
Fan units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box
■
XSCF unit of the crossbar box
■
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S chassis itself and crossbar box chassis itself
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the replacefru command to display the maintenance menu.
53
XSCF> replacefru
3.
Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key.
When the system is configured without a crossbar box, the following screen is
not displayed. Proceed to step 4.
In the following example, since the SPARC M10-4S chassis itself is selected, "1" is
entered.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select a type of model which has FRU to be replaced.
1. BB
(4s Building Block Model)
2. XBBOX
(XB-BOX Model)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1,2|c:cancel] :1
4.
Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key.
In the following example, since BB#0 is showing "Degraded" indicating
abnormality, "1" is entered.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the chassis including replaced FRU.
No. FRU
Status
--- ------------------- -------------1 /BB#0
Degraded
2 /BB#1
Normal
3 /BB#2
Unmount
4 /BB#3
Unmount
5 /BB#4
Unmount
6 /BB#5
Unmount
7 /BB#6
Unmount
8 /BB#7
Unmount
9 /BB#8
Unmount
10 /BB#9
Unmount
11 /BB#10
Unmount
12 /BB#11
Unmount
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1-12|c:cancel] :1
5.
Select the FRU requiring maintenance by specifying it with a numeric key.
In the following example, since the SPARC M10-4S chassis itself is faulty, "1" is
entered.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select the BB or a type of FRU to be replaced.
54
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
1. BB itself
2. FAN
(Fan Unit)
3. PSU
(Power Supply Unit)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1-3|c:cancel] :1
6.
Select the faulty FRU by specifying it with a numeric key.
Since it was confirmed in step 4 that BB#0 is faulty, "1" is also entered here.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select a FRU to be replaced.
No. FRU
Status
--- ------------------- -------------1 /BB#0
Degraded
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1|b:back] :1
7.
After confirming that the selected FRU is displayed, enter "r".
You are about to replace BB#0.
Do you want to continue?[r:replace|c:cancel] :r
8.
Confirm that the CHECK LED of the FRU is on or blinking.
To release a SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box chassis itself, confirm that the
system locator on the chassis is blinking.
For details on the locations of LEDs, see "2.3.2 LEDs on the rear panel (System
locator)" and "2.3.3 LEDs on each component."
Please execute the following steps:
1) Confirm the XSCF STANDBY LED of BB#0 is not lit.
2) Turn off the breaker of BB#0.
3) Remove BB#0.
4) Execute either the following:
4-1) After the exchanged device is connected with the system,
turn on the breaker of BB#0, and please select 'finish'.
4-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device,
please select 'cancel'.
[f:finish|c:cancel] :
You can now start FRU maintenance.
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
55
5.2
Releasing a Chassis from the Physical
Partition
This section describes the procedure for releasing a chassis requiring maintenance
from the physical partition by using dynamic reconfiguration (DR). DR can be used
only for a building block configuration.
Note - When there is no free space on a physical partition or when all the resources are
assigned to the control domain, DR cannot be applied to the physical partition.
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
When the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as the master chassis,
execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby
XSCF.
In response to the confirmation message, enter "y".
When the chassis requiring maintenance is a slave XSCF, proceed to step 4.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby
The XSCF unit switch between the Master and Standby states.
Continue? [y|n] :y
3.
Log in to the XSCF again.
4.
Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm the operating condition of
the physical partition.
In the following example, [Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Running", which
indicates that the physical partition is operating.
XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0
PPAR-ID
PPAR Status
00
Running
5.
Execute the showdomainstatus command to confirm the operating condition
of the logical domain.
In the following example, [Status] of the logical domain displays "Solaris
running", which indicates that Oracle Solaris is operating.
XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0
Logical Domain Name
Status
primary
Solaris
guest0
Solaris
guest1
Solaris
domain01
Solaris
56
running
running
running
running
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
6.
Connect to the control domain console of the physical partition.
7.
Execute the ldm list-domain command to confirm the operating condition of
the logical domain.
In the following example, the [STATE] of the control domain and three guest
domains displays "active", which indicates that the logical domain is operating.
# ldm list-domain
NAME
primary
guest0
guest1
domain01
8.
STATE
active
active
active
active
FLAGS
-n-cv-n----n----n----
CONS
UART
5000
5001
5002
VCPU
14
16
16
16
MEMORY
8G
8G
8G
8G
UTIL
64%
42%
11%
7.3%
UPTIME
2h 54m
2h 54m
2h 54m
2h 54m
Execute the ldm list-devices -a command to check the usage status of the
resource.
The following example shows the resources that are bound to a logical domain
and the resources that are not bound to a logical domain.
# ldm list-devices -a
CORE
ID
%FREE
CPUSET
0
0
(0, 1)
4
0
(8, 9)
8
0
(16, 17)
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------184
0
(368, 369)
188
100
(376, 377)
512
100
(1024, 1025)
516
100
(1032, 1033)
520
100
(1040, 1041)
524
100
(1048, 1049)
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VCPU
PID
%FREE
PM
0
0
no
1
0
no
8
0
no
9
0
no
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------369
0
no
376
100
--377
100
--1024
100
--1025
100
--1032
100
--1033
100
--------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
9.
Execute the ldm list-io command to check the usage status of the I/O device.
In the following example, values displayed under [TYPE] are all "BUS" for PCIE0
to PCIE11 under [NAME], which indicates that they are PCIe root complexes.
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
57
Values displayed under [DOMAIN] are "primary" or "domain01", which
indicates that they are assigned to the control domain or domain01.
# ldm list-io
NAME
---PCIE0
PCIE1
PCIE2
PCIE3
PCIE8
PCIE9
PCIE10
PCIE11
/BB0/CMUL/NET0
/BB0/CMUL/SASHBA
/BB0/PCI0
/BB0/PCI3
/BB0/PCI4
/BB0/PCI7
/BB0/PCI8
/BB1/CMUL/NET0
/BB1/CMUL/SASHBA
/BB1/PCI0
/BB1/PCI3
/BB1/PCI4
/BB1/PCI7
/BB1/PCI8
TYPE
---BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
BUS
--PCIE0
PCIE1
PCIE2
PCIE3
PCIE8
PCIE9
PCIE10
PCIE11
PCIE0
PCIE0
PCIE1
PCIE2
PCIE2
PCIE3
PCIE3
PCIE8
PCIE8
PCIE9
PCIE10
PCIE10
PCIE11
PCIE11
DOMAIN
-----primary
primary
primary
primary
domain01
domain01
domain01
domain01
primary
primary
primary
primary
primary
primary
primary
domain01
domain01
domain01
domain01
domain01
domain01
domain01
STATUS
-----IOV
IOV
IOV
IOV
IOV
IOV
IOV
IOV
OCC
OCC
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
OCC
OCC
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
10. Delete all the I/O devices from the domain to which the I/O devices of the
system board to be deleted are assigned.
In the following example, domain01 is stopped and the PCIe root complexes that
are owned by domain01 and related to the system board to be deleted are
released.
#
#
#
#
#
ldm
ldm
ldm
ldm
ldm
stop domain01
rm-io PCIE8 domain01
rm-io PCIE9 domain01
rm-io PCIE10 domain01
rm-io PCIE11 domain01
11. Execute the ldm list-io command again to check the usage status of the I/O
devices.
The following example shows that the values displayed under [DOMAIN] for
PCIE8, PCIE9, PCIE10, and PCIE11, which were used by domain01, are deleted
and the I/O devices are released.
# ldm list-io
NAME
---PCIE0
58
TYPE
---BUS
BUS
--PCIE0
DOMAIN
-----primary
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
STATUS
-----IOV
PCIE1
PCIE2
PCIE3
PCIE8
PCIE9
PCIE10
PCIE11
/BB0/CMUL/NET0
/BB0/CMUL/SASHBA
/BB0/PCI0
/BB0/PCI3
/BB0/PCI4
/BB0/PCI7
/BB0/PCI8
/BB1/CMUL/NET0
/BB1/CMUL/SASHBA
/BB1/PCI0
/BB1/PCI3
/BB1/PCI4
/BB1/PCI7
/BB1/PCI8
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
BUS
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE
PCIE1
PCIE2
PCIE3
PCIE8
PCIE9
PCIE10
PCIE11
PCIE0
PCIE0
PCIE1
PCIE2
PCIE2
PCIE3
PCIE3
PCIE8
PCIE8
PCIE9
PCIE10
PCIE10
PCIE11
PCIE11
primary
primary
primary
IOV
IOV
IOV
primary
primary
primary
primary
primary
primary
primary
OCC
OCC
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
EMP
12. Execute the showboards command to check the state of the chassis requiring
maintenance.
The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board
(PSB) number.
In the following example, [Fault] of PSB 01-0 displays "Degraded", which
indicates that the system board is operating but has some faulty parts.
XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment
---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00)
Assigned
01-0 00(01)
Assigned
02-0 00(02)
Assigned
03-0 00(03)
Assigned
Pwr
---y
y
y
n
Conn
---y
y
y
n
Conf
---y
y
y
n
Test
------Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Fault
-------Normal
Degraded
Normal
Faulted
13. Execute the deleteboard command to release the chassis requiring
maintenance from the physical partition.
In the following example, PSB 01-0 is released from the physical partition.
XSCF> deleteboard -c disconnect 01-0
14. Execute the showboards command to confirm that the chassis requiring
maintenance has been released from the physical partition.
In the following example, all of [Pwr], [Conn], and [Conf] of PSB 01-0 display
"n", which indicates that PSB 01-0 has been released.
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
59
XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment
---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00)
Assigned
01-0 00(01)
Assigned
02-0 00(02)
Assigned
03-0 00(03)
Assigned
5.3
Pwr
---y
n
y
n
Conn
---y
n
y
n
Conf
---y
n
y
n
Test
------Passed
Passed
Passed
Passed
Fault
-------Normal
Degraded
Normal
Faulted
Powering Off the Physical Partition
Requiring Maintenance
This section describes the procedure for powering off the physical partition requiring
maintenance. This is applicable if the system has a building block configuration and
has multiple physical partitions.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
When the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as the master chassis,
execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby
XSCF.
In response to the confirmation message, enter "y".
When the chassis requiring maintenance is a slave XSCF, proceed to step 4.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby
The XSCF unit switch between the Master and Standby states.
Continue? [y|n] :y
3.
Log in to the master XSCF again.
4.
Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm the operating condition of
the physical partition.
In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Running",
which indicates that the physical partition is operating.
XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0
PPAR-ID
PPAR Status
00
Running
5.
60
Execute the showdomainstatus command to confirm the operating condition
of the logical domain.
In the following example, [Status] of the logical domain displays "Solaris
running", which indicates that Oracle Solaris is operating.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0
Logical Domain Name
Status
primary
Solaris
4S-159-D0-G0
Solaris
4S-159-D0-G1
Solaris
4S-159-D0-G2
Solaris
6.
running
running
running
running
Execute the showboards command to check the state of the chassis requiring
maintenance.
The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board
(PSB) number.
In the following example, we can see that [PPAR-ID] of PSB 01-0 is "00".
XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment
---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00)
Assigned
01-0 00(01)
Assigned
7.
Pwr
---y
y
Conn
---y
y
Conf
---y
y
Test
------Passed
Passed
Fault
-------Normal
Normal
Execute the poweroff command to stop all the logical domains on the
physical partition requiring maintenance.
In response to the confirmation message, enter "y".
XSCF> poweroff -p 0
PPAR-IDs to power off:00
Continue? [y|n] :y
00 : Powering off
8.
Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to the
physical partition is turned off.
In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-ID 00 displays "Powered Off",
which indicates that the power to the physical partition has been turned off.
XSCF> showpparstatus -p 0
PPAR-ID
PPAR Status
00
Powered Off
9.
Switch the mode switches for the master chassis and those chassis whose
XSCFs are in the standby state to Service mode.
- For a building block configuration (without crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Service mode.
- For a building block configuration (with crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Service mode.
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
61
5.4
Stopping the Entire System
This section describes the procedure for stopping the entire system. To undertake
system-stopped maintenance, power off all the physical partitions to stop the entire
system before physically removing any components.
There are two ways of stopping the system, as follows:
■
Stopping the system with the XSCF command
■
Stopping the system from the operation panel
Note - Before stopping the system, inform the users that the system will be stopped.
Note - When a physical partition is stopped by operating the XSCF command or the
operation panel, all the logical domains on the physical partition are stopped. Stop
applications as required.
1.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4.1 Stopping the system with the XSCF command" or "5.4.2
Stopping the system from the operation panel."
2.
Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the power to the
physical partition is turned off.
In the following example, [PPAR Status] of PPAR-IDs 00, 01, and 02 display
"Powered Off", which indicates that the power to all the physical partitions has
been turned off.
XSCF> showpparstatus -a
PPAR-ID
PPAR Status
00
Powered Off
01
Powered Off
02
Powered Off
3.
Execute the showdomainstatus command to confirm the operating condition
of the logical domain.
In the following example, [Status] of the logical domain displays "Solaris
powering down", which indicates that Oracle Solaris is shutting down.
XSCF> showdomainstatus -p 0
Logical Domain Name
Status
primary
Solaris
4S-159-D0-G0
Solaris
4S-159-D0-G1
Solaris
4S-159-D0-G2
Solaris
62
powering
powering
powering
powering
down
down
down
down
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
5.4.1
Stopping the system with the XSCF command
1.
Switch the mode switch on the operation panel to Service mode.
For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel."
Note - For a building block configuration, switch the mode switches of the master chassis
and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the poweroff command.
In response to the confirmation message, enter "y".
In the following example, the status of PPAR-IDs 00 and 01 displays "Powering
off", which indicates that the power to the physical partitions is being turned off.
XSCF> poweroff -a
PPAR-IDs to power off:00,01
Continue? [y|n] :y
00 : Powering off
01 : Powering off
The following processes are performed.
- Oracle Solaris is completely shut down.
- The system stops and enters the POWERON READY state (The XSCF is running).
For details, see "6.2.2 Stopping the whole system" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
4.
Check that the POWER LED on the operation panel is off.
Note - For a building block configuration, check the POWER LEDs on all the chassis that
make up the system.
5.4.2
Stopping the system from the operation panel
1.
Switch the mode switch on the operation panel to Service mode.
For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel."
Note - For a building block configuration, switch the mode switches of the master chassis
and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state.
2.
Press the power switch on the operation panel for 4 seconds or more.
For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel."
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
63
Note - For a building block configuration, press the power switch on the master chassis. The
power switches of the other chassis are disabled.
3.
Check that the POWER LED on the operation panel is off.
Note - For a building block configuration, check the POWER LEDs on all the chassis that
make up the system.
5.5
Accessing Components
This section describes the operations that must be completed prior to accessing a
component requiring maintenance.
5.5.1
Lowering the cable support
For a component that is accessed from the rear of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S, the
cable support must be lowered and then the cables removed.
1. Loosen the right and left screws fixing the cable support, and unlock it by
pulling the upper and lower metal fittings towards you (in the direction of the
arrow).
64
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 5-1
2.
5.5.2
Locations of screws holding the cable support
Lower the cable support.
Removing the power cord
When removing the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box to perform
maintenance work on a component, do so only after removing the cable clamp from
the power cord.
1. Release the latch (A in the figure) of the cable clamp.
Pulling the cable clamp toward the rear of the chassis facilitates release of the
latch.
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
65
Figure 5-2
Releasing the cable clamp (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
A
Figure 5-3
Releasing the cable clamp (crossbar box)
A
2.
66
Remove the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S from the PSU backplane unit,
or remove the power cord of the crossbar box from the power supply unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
5.5.3
Figure 5-4
Removing the power cord (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Figure 5-5
Removing the power cord (crossbar box)
Removing the front cover
When performing maintenance on a component from the front of a SPARC M10-4S
or crossbar box chassis, remove the front cover before starting the work.
1. Release the right and left slide locks of the front cover and pull it towards the
front.
Chapter 5
Understanding the Preparations for Enabling Maintenance
67
Figure 5-6
Releasing the slide locks of the front cover (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Figure 5-7
Releasing the slide locks of the front cover (crossbar box)
2.
68
Lift the front cover upwards to remove it.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 6
Understanding the Preparations for
Restoring the System
This chapter describes the procedures required to restore the system after component
maintenance. See this chapter, as required, when performing maintenance on each
component described in Chapter 7 onwards.
■
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru Command
6.1
■
Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition
■
Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance
■
Starting the Entire System
■
Restoring the Chassis
Incorporating an FRU into the System
with the replacefru Command
This section describes the procedure for incorporating a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
into the system after maintenance. To do this, resume the replacefru command,
which is running, to incorporate the FRU into the system.
1. After completing maintenance of the target FRU, return to the operation of the
replacefru command of the XSCF firmware, and enter "f".
Please execute the following steps:
1) Confirm the XSCF STANDBY LED of BB#0 is not lit.
2) Turn off the breaker of BB#0.
3) Remove BB#0.
4) Execute either the following:
4-1) After the exchanged device is connected with the system,
turn on the breaker of BB#0, and please select 'finish'.
4-2) If you want to suspend the maintenance without exchanging device,
please select 'cancel'.
[f:finish|c:cancel] :f
The following is displayed. Wait until the processing is complete.
69
Waiting for BB#0 to enter install state.
[This operation may take up to 20 minute(s)]
(progress scale reported in seconds)
0..... 30.. done
Waiting for BB#0 to enter ready state.
[This operation may take up to 45 minute(s)]
(progress scale reported in seconds)
0..... 30..... 60..... done
2.
After confirming that the FRU to be diagnosed is displayed, enter "s".
Do you want to start to diagnose BB#0?[s:start|c:cancel] :s
3.
After confirming again that the FRU to be diagnosed is displayed, enter "y".
Diagnostic tests for BB#0 have started.
Initial diagnosis is about to start, Continue?[y|n] :y
The following is displayed. Wait until the processing is complete.
SB#00-0 power on sequence started.
0..... 30..... 60....end
Initial diagnosis started. [1800sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120.....150.....180.....210.....240.....|
270.....300.....330.....360..end
Initial diagnosis has completed.
SB power off sequence started. [1200sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120....end
SB powered off.
PSB Test
Fault
---- ------- -------00-0 Passed Normal
done
4.
Confirm that the status is normal ("Normal") after diagnosis, and then enter
"f".
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Status of the replaced FRU.
FRU
Status
------------------- -------------/BB#0
Normal
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------The replacement of BB#0 has completed normally.[f:finish] :f
5.
70
When the maintenance menu appears, enter "c" to exit the operation.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintenance/Replacement Menu
Please select a type of model which has FRU to be replaced.
1. BB
(4s Building Block Model)
2. XBBOX
(XB-BOX Model)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Select [1,2|c:cancel] :c
6.2
Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical
Partition
This section describes the procedure for incorporating a chassis into a physical
partition by using dynamic reconfiguration (DR) after FRU maintenance.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the addboard command to incorporate the target chassis into the
physical partition.
In response to the confirmation message, enter "y".
Note - When you incorporate a system board with the addboard command, the target system
board is incorporated into the physical partition after its hardware diagnosis. Therefore, it
may take time for the command execution to complete.
In the following example, PSB 01-0 is incorporated into PPAR-ID 0.
XSCF> addboard -c configure -p 0 01-0
PSB#01-0 will be configured into PPAR-ID 0. Continue?[y|n] :y
Start connecting PSB to PPAR. [3600sec]
0..... 30..... 60..... 90.....120.....150.....180.....210.....240.....
270.....300.....330.....360.....390.....420.....450.....480.....510.....
540.....570.....600.....630.....660.....690.....720.....750.....780.....
810.....840.....870.....900.....930.....960.....end
Connected PSB to PPAR.
Start configuring PSB to Logical Domains (LDoms) Manager. [1800sec]
0.....end
Configured PSB to Logical Domains (LDoms) Manager.
Operation has completed.
3.
Execute the showresult command to check the end status of the addboard
command that was just executed.
The following example shows that "0" is returned as the end status and the
execution of the addboard command has been completed successfully.
Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System
71
XSCF> showresult
0
4.
Execute the showboards command to confirm that the target chassis has
been incorporated into the physical partition.
The BB-ID of the chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board
(PSB) number.
In the following example, [Fault] of PSB 01-0 displays "Normal", which indicates
that the system board is operating normally.
XSCF> showboards -a
PSB PPAR-ID(LSB) Assignment
---- ------------ ----------00-0 00(00)
Assigned
01-0 00(01)
Assigned
5.
Pwr
---y
y
Conn
---y
y
Conf
---y
y
Test
------Passed
Passed
Fault
-------Normal
Normal
If you performed maintenance on a PCIe card using dynamic reconfiguration
(DR), restore the devices that were released before the maintenance to their
original configurations.
Reassign the devices that were released from the root domain and I/O domains.
#
#
#
#
#
#
ldm
ldm
ldm
ldm
ldm
ldm
add-io PCIE8 domain01
add-io PCIE9 domain01
add-io PCIE10 domain01
add-io PCIE11 domain01
remove-io /BB1/PCI0 domain01 (*1)
add-io /BB1/PCI0 iodomain (*1)
*1: PCIe slots are automatically assigned to the root domain. Therefore, to
reassign them to I/O domains, they must be released and then reassigned.
6.
Start the root domain and I/O domains.
If a virtual service is provided, the virtual service is automatically restarted.
Note - Start the root domain first, and then start I/O domains.
# ldm start-domain domain01
# ldm start-domain iodomain
7.
72
If there is a guest domain that uses a virtual device, log in to the guest domain
to restart the use of the device or incorporate it into the duplication function
again.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
6.3
Powering On the Physical Partition
Requiring Maintenance
This section describes the procedure for powering on a physical partition requiring
maintenance.
1. Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose
XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (without crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (with crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with
the FRU after the completion of maintenance.
If there is no problem, nothing is displayed.
XSCF> showstatus
4.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081235006; Operator_Panel_Switch:Locked;
+ System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2047h; Serial:2081235006;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:160 GB;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2047h; Serial:2081228004;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:128 GB;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
5.
If the state of the master chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to
the standby state before maintenance, execute the switchscf command to
switch the chassis to the master XSCF.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby
6.
Execute the poweron command to power on the stopped physical partition.
Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System
73
Enter the PPAR-ID you noted in advance by using the showboards command.
In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is specified.
XSCF> poweron -p 0
6.4
Starting the Entire System
This section describes the procedure for starting the entire system.
The system can be started in either of the following two ways:
■
Starting the system with an XSCF command
■
1.
Starting the system from the operation panel
Check that the XSCF STANDBY LED on the operation panel is on.
Note - For a building block configuration, check the XSCF STANDBY LEDs of all the chassis
constituting the system.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Switch the mode switch on the operation panel to Locked mode.
For details, see "2.2.2 Control function of the operation panel."
Note - For a building block configuration, switch the mode switches of the master chassis
and those chassis whose XSCFs are in the standby state.
4.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with
the FRU after the completion of maintenance.
If there is no problem, nothing is displayed.
XSCF> showstatus
5.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081229003; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:On; System_Phase:Cabinet Power On;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Running;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2050h; Serial:2081229003;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A0
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:320 GB;
74
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------PCI#0 Status:Normal; Name_Property:pci;
+ Vendor-ID:108e; Device-ID:9020;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:0000; Subsystem-ID:0000;
+ Model:;
+ Connection:7001;
PCIBOX#7001; Status:Normal; Ver:1110h; Serial:2121237001;
+ FRU-Part-Number:;
IOB Status:Normal; Serial:PP123403JE ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B66X 008AG
LINKBOARD Status:Normal; Serial:PP1234026P
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20365-B60X 001AA
;
;
;
PCI#1 Name_Property:ethernet;
+ Vendor-ID:1077; Device-ID:8000;
+ Subsystem_Vendor-ID:1077; Subsystem-ID:017e;
+ Model:;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
For details, see "3.3.3
6.
Checking the status of a component."
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
After a short while, the following processes are performed.
■
■
The POWER LED on the operation panel will be turned on.
The power-on self-test (POST; self diagnosis when powering on) will be
executed.
Then, the system starts up. For details, see "6.1 Starting the System" in the
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
6.4.1
Starting the system with an XSCF command
1.
Execute the poweron command.
In response to the confirmation message, enter "y".
XSCF> poweron -a
PPAR-IDs to power on:00,01
Continue? [y|n] :y
00 : Powering on
01 : Powering on
6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel
1.
Press the power switch on the operation panel for 1 second or more (less
Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System
75
than 4 seconds).
For details, see "2.2.2
Control function of the operation panel."
Note - For a building block configuration, press the power switch on the master chassis. The
power switches of the other chassis are disabled.
6.5
Restoring the Chassis
This section describes operations required to restore the chassis.
6.5.1
Installing the power cord
If the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box was removed to perform
the maintenance work, connect the power cord and then attach the cable clamp to the
power cord.
1. Connect the power cord of the SPARC M10-4S to the PSU backplane unit, or
connect the power cord of the crossbar box to the power supply unit.
Figure 6-1
76
Installing the power cord (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 6-2
2.
Installing the power cord (crossbar box)
Clip the cable clamp around the power cord and then fix the cable clamp.
The cable clamp is firmly fixed by locking the latch (A in the figure) and then
pushing the cable clamp towards the front of the chassis.
Figure 6-3
Locking the cable clamp (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
A
Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System
77
Figure 6-4
Locking the cable clamp (crossbar box)
A
6.5.2
Fixing the cable support
After performing maintenance on a component at the rear of the SPARC M10-4/M104S, lift the cable support and fix it in place.
1. Lift the cable support and lock it in place by pushing the upper and lower
screw fittings towards the back (direction of the arrow).
78
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 6-5
2.
Locking the cable support
Tighten the right and left screws to fix the cable support.
Note - Check that the cable support is firmly attached and fixed.
6.5.3
Installing the front cover
If the front cover of the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box was removed to perform
maintenance, install it after installing the components at the front of or inside the
chassis.
1. To install the front cover, insert the tabs of the front cover into the notches at
Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System
79
the bottom front of the chassis.
80
Figure 6-6
Installing the front cover (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Figure 6-7
Installing the front cover (crossbar box)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - Check that the front cover is firmly attached and fixed.
Chapter 6 Understanding the Preparations for Restoring the System
81
82
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the CPU memory unit mounted
on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. The CPU memory unit lower can only be replaced. The
CPU memory unit upper can be replaced, expanded, and reduced.
■
Configuration of the CPU Memory Units
7.1
■
Before Maintaining a CPU Memory Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of a CPU Memory Unit
■
Removing a CPU Memory Unit
■
Installing a CPU Memory Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the CPU Memory
Units
This section describes the configuration and locations of the CPU memory units.
A CPU memory unit is composed of the following two parts: the CPU memory unit
lower and the CPU memory unit upper.
83
Figure 7-1
Location of CPU memory unit
(1)
(2)
Location number
Component
1
CPU memory unit lower (CMUU)
2
CPU memory unit upper (CMUL)
There are two types of CPU memory units: FRAME-A and FRAME-B. The type of a
CPU memory unit can be determined from the indication on the label (A in the
figure). If a CPU memory unit does not have the "FRAME-B" indication, it is a
FRAME-A unit.
84
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-2
Type of CPU memory unit
A
7.2
Before Maintaining a CPU Memory
Unit
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the CPU memory
units, as well as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
7.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 7-1 lists the types of maintenance for the CPU memory units. For the definition
of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
85
Table 7-1
Type of maintenance for CPU memory unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Single-chassis configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Supported (*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
*1:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
*2: It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
7.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 7-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the CPU memory units.
To expand/reduce the CPU memory unit upper, it is necessary to remove/install the
CPU memory unit lower.
The procedure for expanding a CPU memory unit upper is the same as that for
installing a CPU memory unit upper. The procedure for reducing a CPU memory
unit upper is the same as that for removing a CPU memory unit upper.
In addition, the CPU memory unit upper and CPU memory unit lower are connected
by the PCI Express (PCIe) cable. The PCIe cable should be replaced when the CPU
memory unit upper is replaced. Similarly, the cable is installed when the CPU
memory unit upper is expanded, and removed when it is reduced.
Table 7-2
Maintenance flow
Task
Lower unit
replacement
Upper unit
replacement
Upper unit
expansion
Upper unit
reduction
1
Preparation
7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
2
Accessing a CPU memory
unit
7.4.1
7.4.1
7.4.1
7.4.1
3
Removing a CPU memory
unit lower
7.4.2
7.4.2
7.4.2
7.4.2
4
Removing a CPU memory
unit upper
7.4.3
7.4.3
- (*)
7.4.3
5
Removing a PCIe cable
7.4.4
-
7.4.4
7.4.4
6
Installing a PCIe cable
7.5.1
-
7.5.1
7.5.1
7
Installing a CPU memory
unit upper
7.5.2
7.5.2
7.5.2
- (*)
8
Installing a CPU memory
unit lower
7.5.3
7.5.3
7.5.3
7.5.3
9
Restoring the chassis
7.5.4
7.5.4
7.5.4
7.5.4
10
Restoring the system
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
* It is necessary to remove or install a filler unit.
86
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
7.2.3
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when you replace a CPU memory unit:
■
Do not replace a CPU memory unit at the same time as the PSU backplane unit. If
you replace both a CPU memory unit and the PSU backplane unit at the same
time, the system will fail to operate normally. Replace the CPU memory unit or
PSU backplane unit, and then confirm that the newly installed part operates
normally by executing the showhardconf or showstatus command. Then, replace
the other Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).
■
■
■
■
■
7.2.4
When replacing the CPU memory unit, memory modules should be removed
from the old unit and remounted in the new one. Mount the new unit in the same
position as the old unit.
The weight of the CPU memory unit is 17 kg (37.4 lb). Maintenance must be done
by two people if the CPU memory unit is mounted at the 24 or higher U of the
rack. If you attempt to perform the maintenance work alone, you may injure
yourself or cause damage to the chassis.
For both the CPU memory unit upper and CPU memory unit lower, there are
eight types based on the combinations of CPU type and the number of memory
slots. Each type of CPU memory unit, both upper and lower, can be used in
combination with one another.
Before replacing the CPU memory unit lower, execute the dumpconfig command
to save the system setting information. When the CPU memory unit lower is
replaced, the CPU Activation setting information and CPU Activation keys may
be deleted. To restore the CPU Activation setting information and CPU Activation
keys that have been saved with the dumpconfig command, execute the restoreconfig
command.
The XCP firmware version must be the same before and after replacement of the
CPU memory unit lower. For checking the version, see "4.2.2 Confirming the
software and firmware configurations."
Precautions for installation
Note the following points when you expand a CPU memory unit upper:
■
You need to add four PCIe cables when connecting the CPU memory unit upper
to the CPU memory unit lower.
■
The 2-CPU configuration of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S has four root complexes,
and the 4-CPU configuration can have four, seven or eight root complexes. If you
change a 2-CPU configuration into a 4-CPU configuration by adding CPU
memory units on site, Fujitsu recommends a configuration with four root
complexes. This configuration inherits the configuration and mounting rules of
the I/O bus of the 2-CPU configuration. Adopting a configuration with seven or
eight root complexes increases the maximum number of mounted PCIe cards.
However, since the I/O bus is reconfigured, the physical partition needs to be
reconfigured.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
87
A root complex consists of an I/O controller on a processor, PCI switches, and PCI
devices under the I/O controller.
■
7.2.5
For SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with two CPUs installed, if a CPU memory unit is
expanded in order to add two CPUs when the I/O bus reconfiguration is
"enabled", it will change the device paths of the I/O devices that have been used.
Before adding the memory unit, execute the setpparmode command by specifying
"false" for ioreconfigure with the -m function=mode option to "disable" the I/O bus
reconfiguration function.
Precautions for removal
Note the following points when you reduce a CPU memory unit upper:
You must also reduce the four PCIe cables for connecting the CPU memory unit
upper with the CPU memory unit lower.
■
■
7.3
If a CPU memory unit is diminished to remove two CPUs, it will eliminate the
root complexes for the two CPUs in use up to then, making some PCIe slots
unavailable. To make the PCIe slots available, execute the setpparmode command
by specifying "true" or "nextboot" for ioreconfigure with the -m function=mode
option to "enable" the I/O bus reconfiguration function. Since the I/O bus is
reconfigured, the physical partition must also be reconfigured.
Enabling the Removal of a CPU
Memory Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a
CPU memory unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance
type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
88
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
7.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the chassis, in which the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance is
mounted, from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
7.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
89
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred.
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
7.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
Note - When the CPU memory unit lower is replaced, all of the XSCF setting information
may be lost. Perform this operation only after backing up the XSCF setting information.
90
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the dumpconfig command to backup the XSCF setting information
only when replacing the CPU memory unit lower in a singe-chassis
configuration.
For details, see "10.9.2 Saving XSCF setting information" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
If you are not replacing the CPU memory unit lower, backup is not necessary.
Proceed to step 4.
XSCF> dumpconfig
4.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred.
5.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
6.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
7.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis.
Proceed to step 8.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
8.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
7.4
Removing a CPU Memory Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing a CPU memory unit. Remove the
CPU memory unit lower first, then remove the CPU memory unit upper. Enable the
removal of the CPU memory unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see "7.3
Enabling the Removal of a CPU Memory Unit."
Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use the SPARC
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
91
M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit.
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
7.4.1
Accessing a CPU memory unit
1.
Remove the crossbar cables from the cable support.
Perform this procedure only when using equipment rack model 26xx or
equipment rack model 16xx. The procedure may vary depending on the model
of the equipment rack.
If you are not using equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx,
proceed on to step 2.
Procedure when equipment rack model 26xx is used
a. Remove all the crossbar cables from the crossbar unit.
Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.
b. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support (A in the figure) to
which the crossbar cables are fixed.
Figure 7-3
Hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support
A
92
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
c. Remove the screw securing the cable holder (A in the figure) that is fixed to
the supporting column on the rear of the rack, and then install the cable
holder by rotating it 180 degrees.
Figure 7-4
Cable holder screw
A
d. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable
holder.
Figure 7-5
Fixing crossbar cables
Procedure when equipment rack model 16xx is used
a. Remove all the crossbar cables from the crossbar unit.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
93
Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.
b. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support (A in the figure) to
which the crossbar cables are fixed.
Figure 7-6
Hook-and-loop fastener of the cable support
A
c. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable
holder installed on the supporting column on the rear of the rack.
Figure 7-7
2.
94
Fixing crossbar cables
Lower the cable support.
For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
3.
Remove all the cables connected to the external interface on the rear of the
chassis.
The cables to be removed are as follows.
■
Interface cable connected to the PCI Express (PCIe) card
■
Crossbar cables (They may have been removed in step 1.)
■
XSCF BB control cable
■
XSCF DUAL control cable
■
XSCF-LAN cable
■
Serial cable
■
LAN cable
■
SAS cable
■
USB cable
Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.
4.
Remove all the PCIe card cassettes.
For details, see "13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette."
Note - Make a note of the positions of the PCIe card cassettes before removing them to ensure
that they are reinstalled correctly.
5.
If any crossbar units are mounted, remove them.
For details, see "9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit."
6.
Loosen the three screws holding the mounting frame and then remove it.
Figure 7-8
Screws securing the mounting frame
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
95
7.4.2
Removing the CPU memory unit lower
This section describes the procedure for removing a CPU memory unit lower.
Note - To expand or reduce a CPU memory unit upper, it is first necessary to remove the
CPU memory unit lower.
1.
Loosen the screws securing the levers of the CPU memory unit lower (rear
left side) and then lower the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit
lower to the horizontal position.
Figure 7-9
2.
96
Position of the screws and the levers of the CPU memory unit lower
Hold the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit lower and pull out the
CPU memory unit lower about 10 cm (3.9 in.)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-10
3.
Pulling out CPU memory unit lower
Remove the CPU memory unit lower while supporting it from below with one
hand.
Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit lower on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Note - Be careful not to damage the right and left levers when placing the CPU memory unit
on the ESD mat.
Figure 7-11
4.
Removing the CPU memory unit lower
Remove the CPU memory unit upper or the filler unit for the CPU memory unit
upper.
For details, see "7.4.3 Removing the CPU memory unit upper."
You can expand the CPU memory unit upper by performing the above steps.
You do not have to perform step 5.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
97
5.
Remove the memory modules from the CPU memory unit lower and install
them in the new CPU memory unit lower.
For details, see "8.5 Removing Memory" and "8.6 Installing Memory."
Note - Mount the memory in the same position as it was mounted in the removed CPU
memory unit lower.
7.4.3
Removing the CPU memory unit upper
Removal of a CPU memory unit upper is performed after removal of the CPU
memory unit lower. Perform reduction using the same procedure. You can remove a
filler unit by performing the procedure up to step 9.
Note - This work should all be performed from the rear of the rack.
1.
Remove the CPU memory unit lower.
For details, see "7.4.2 Removing the CPU memory unit lower."
Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit lower on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
2.
Unlock (push) the top cover of the CPU memory unit and remove the cover by
sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 7-12
3.
98
Releasing the lock
Unlock (push) the right-side guide and remove it by sliding it in the direction
of the arrow.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-13
4.
Unlock (push) the left-side guide (when viewed from the rear) and remove it
by sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 7-14
5.
Removing right-side guide
Removing left-side guide
Remove the two PCIe cables (A in the figure) on the right side that connect
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
99
the CPU memory units upper and lower, from the CPU memory unit upper.
In the case of a filler unit, you can omit this step because PCIe cables are not
present.
Figure 7-15
Removing the right-side PCIe cables
A
6.
100
Remove the two PCIe cables (A in the figure) on the left side that connect the
CPU memory units upper and lower, from the CPU memory unit upper.
In the case of a filler unit, you can omit this step because PCIe cables are not
present.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-16
Removing the left-side cables
A
7.
Of the two PCIe cables on the left side, also remove the rear one from the CPU
memory unit lower, as it is short.
In the case of a filler unit, you can omit this step because PCIe cables are not
present.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
101
Figure 7-17
Removing the PCIe cable from the left side rear
Perform the following work from the rear side of the chassis. Figure 7-18 shows the
standing position (A in the figure) of a field engineer.
102
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-18
Standing position of a field engineer
A
8.
Raise the levers (A in the figure) on the right and left sides to release the CPU
memory unit upper.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
103
Figure 7-19
Positions of right and left levers
A
A
9.
While holding the levers, slightly lift the CPU memory unit upper.
10. Lift the CPU memory unit upwards and then remove it carefully.
Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit upper on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Figure 7-20
104
Removing CPU memory unit upper
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
11. Remove the memory modules from the removed CPU memory unit upper and
then install them in the new CPU memory unit upper.
For details, see "8.5 Removing Memory" and "8.6 Installing Memory."
Note - Mount the memory in the same position as it was mounted in the removed CPU
memory unit upper.
7.4.4
Removing a PCI Express cable
Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To
determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 7-2.
When reducing a CPU memory unit upper or when replacing a PCIe cable, remove
the PCIe cable. You can expand a CPU memory unit upper by performing the above
procedure up to step 9.
For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC M10-4S
with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, perform the procedure from step 2.
1. Remove the eight screws at both ends of the XSCF cable connection port on
the rear of the CPU memory unit lower.
Use a flathead screwdriver (small) to remove them.
For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC
M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, this step is not necessary.
Figure 7-21
Screws for both ends of the XSCF cable connection ports (for the
SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
105
2.
Loosen the two screws holding the upper rear side of the CPU memory unit
lower. Then, remove the rear cover (A in the figure) by pulling it in the
direction of the arrow.
Figure 7-22
Removing the rear cover
A
3.
106
Remove the XSCF board.
- For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Remove the three screws fixing the XSCF board (A in the figure) and rear
cover. Tilt the right lever of the XSCF mount with your fingers about 5 mm (0.2
in.) to the right (B in the figure). Lift up the right side of the XSCF board and
release the connection of the connector (C in the figure).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-23
Releasing a connected XSCF board (for SPARC M10-4 with a
FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
A
B
C
- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Remove the four screws fixing the XSCF board (A in the figure). Then, lift the
right side of the XSCF board to release the connector.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
107
Figure 7-24
Releasing a connected XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a
FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
A
4.
Pull out the XSCF board diagonally to the right (arrow).
Note - Place the removed XSCF board on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Figure 7-25
108
Pulling out an XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-26
5.
Pulling out an XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
Remove the screw fixing the XSCF mount.
- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Remove the one screw fixing the XSCF mount (A in the figure).
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
109
Figure 7-27
Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
A
110
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-28
Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
A
- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Remove the two screws fixing the XSCF mount (A in the figure).
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
111
Figure 7-29
Screw for the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)
A
6.
112
Remove the XSCF mount.
- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Raise the protruding left lever (B in the figure) of the XSCF mount (A in the
figure) by about 2 mm (0.1 in.) with your fingers, and slide it about 8 mm (0.4
in.) toward the front (C in the figure). Then, remove it upward (D in the
figure).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-30
B
Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
A
D
C
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
113
Figure 7-31
Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
A
B
D
C
- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Remove the XSCF mount (A in the figure) upward (B in the figure).
114
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-32
Removing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)
A
7.
B
Remove the screw fixing the CPU memory unit board.
- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Remove the one black screw (A in the figure) fixing the center part of the
radiator on the front and the four screws fixing the CPU memory unit board (B
in the figure).
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
115
Figure 7-33
Screws on the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M104S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
A
B
- For SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Remove the one black screw (A in the figure) fixing the center part of the
radiator on the front and the six screws fixing the CPU memory unit board (B
in the figure).
116
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-34
Screws on the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4S with
a FRAME-B CPU memory unit)
A
B
8.
Place your thumb on the frame located at the center of the right and left sides
of the CPU memory unit board (A in the figure) and insert your fingers under
the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure) from the side of the connector
unit.
Note - Be careful not to touch or catch your clothes or wrist strap on a connector pin located
on the back side of the CPU memory unit board.
Note - Hard objects such as a machine tools should not come in contact with the connector
located on the back side of the CPU memory unit board.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
117
Figure 7-35
Finger position when releasing the connection of the connector (surface)
A
A
Left
Figure 7-36
Right
Finger position when releasing the connection of the connector (rear
surface)
B
B
Right
9.
118
Left
Supporting the frame with your thumb (A in the figure), disconnect the
connection of the connector by pushing up the left and right sides at the
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
same time with the fingers that are inserted under the CPU memory unit board
(B in the figure).
Figure 7-37
How to disconnect the connection of the connector
A
A
B
B
10. Place your thumb on the connector unit located at the center of the right and
left sides of the CPU memory unit board (A in the figure) and hold the board
by inserting your fingers under the CPU memory unit board (B in the figure)
from the side of the connector unit.
Note - Place the removed CPU memory unit board on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
119
Figure 7-38
Finger position when holding the board (surface)
A
A
Left
Figure 7-39
Right
Finger position when holding the board (rear surface)
B
B
Right
Left
11. Lift the CPU memory unit board in the horizontal position and remove it from
the frame.
120
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-40
Removing the CPU memory unit board
12. Remove the sheet (A in the figure).
You can expand the CPU memory unit upper by performing the above
procedure. You do not have to perform step 10.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
121
Figure 7-41
Removing the sheet
A
13. Remove the three PCIe cables.
The direction in which the PCIe cables are removed varies depending on the
type of the CPU memory unit.
Note - Do not attempt to remove a PCIe cable in the wrong direction. If excessive force is
used to remove a PCIe cable, it may be damaged.
- The connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU
memory unit
122
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-42
Removing the PCIe cables (with the connectors for the three PCIe
cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit)
- The connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside of the CPU memory unit
and the other two facing the front of the CPU memory unit
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
123
Figure 7-43
7.5
Removing the PCIe cables (with the connector for one PCIe cable
facing the outside and the other two facing the front of the CPU
memory unit)
Installing a CPU Memory Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a CPU memory unit.
Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use the SPARC
M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit.
Note - When mounting a CPU memory unit, check the connectors on both of the
chassis and CPU memory unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the
pins are neatly arranged in lines. If there is a bent pin in a connector, mounting a
CPU memory unit may damage the chassis or CPU memory unit. Also, carefully
proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent.
7.5.1
Installing a PCI Express cable
Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To
determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 7-2.
124
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
When expanding the CPU memory unit upper or when replacing a PCIe cable,
connect the PCIe cable. You can reduce a CPU memory unit upper by performing the
procedure from step 2.
Note - When expanding a CPU memory unit upper, first connect the PCIe cable to the CPU
memory unit lower. The PCIe cables are attached as an accessory of the CPU memory unit
upper.
1.
Connect the three PCIe cables by matching their position labels of the PCle
cable with the corresponding position marks on the PCIBP board (A in the
figure).
The direction in which the PCIe cables are installed varies depending on the type
of the CPU memory unit.
When reducing a CPU memory unit upper, you do not have to perform this step
because the PCIe cables are not present.
Note - Do not attempt to install a PCIe cable in the wrong direction. If excessive force is used
to install a PCIe cable, it may be damaged.
Note - Ensure that the PCIe cables are firmly connected and secure.
- The connectors for the three PCIe cables facing the outside of the CPU
memory unit
Figure 7-44
Installing the PCIe cables (with the connectors for the three PCIe
cables facing the outside of the CPU memory unit)
A
- The connector for one PCIe cable facing the outside of the CPU memory
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
125
unit and the other two facing the front of the CPU memory unit
Figure 7-45
Installing the PCIe cables (with the connector for one PCIe cable
facing the outside and the two facing the front of the CPU memory
unit)
A
2.
126
Install the sheet (A in the figure).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-46
Installing sheet
A
3.
Hold the connector unit at the center of the CPU memory unit board and
install it on the frame in the horizontal position.
For how to hold the CPU memory unit board, see Figure 7-38 and Figure 7-39.
Note - Do not tilt the CPU memory unit board when installing it. The board may be damaged
by hitting the back side of the board against a protruding part or the frame guide.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
127
Figure 7-47
Correct position of the CPU memory unit board
OK
Figure 7-48
Wrong position of the CPU memory unit board
NO
- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Install the frame so that the bent tip of the frame (C in the figure) can be
inserted into the space (B in the figure) between the end face of the far side of
the CPU memory unit board and the radiator (A in the figure).
a. Insert the board carefully into the frame, keeping it horizontal.
b. If the threaded hole of the board and the threaded hole of the frame (D in
the figure) do not match when inserting the frame, place the board by
adjusting the position of the frame so that the outer circumference of the
128
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
threaded hole of the frame can be seen (E in the figure).
c. Attach the connector by pressing down the connector units (F and G in the
figure) located at the center of the right and left sides of the board at the same
time.
Figure 7-49
Installing the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
A
C
B
F
G
D
E
- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Install the CPU memory unit board with the left and right guides (A and B in
the figure) and the left guide on the board (C in the figure) as a guide.
a. Insert the board carefully into the frame, keeping it horizontal.
b. Attach the connector by pressing down the connector units (D and E in the
figure) located at the center of the right and left sides of the board at the same
time.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
129
Figure 7-50
Installing the CPU memory unit board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a
FRAME-B CPU memory unit)
A
B
E
D
C
4.
130
Fix the CPU memory unit board with screws.
- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Fix the CPU memory unit board with four screws and the center part of the
radiator on the front with one black screw.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Fix the CPU memory unit board with six screws.
5.
Install the XSCF mount and fix it with screws.
- For the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Align the one point on the left and two points on the right of the XSCF mount
with the frame guides of the CPU memory unit lower. Then, install the XSCF
mount by sliding it to the front and fix it with one screw.
Figure 7-51
Installing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a
FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
- For the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit
Align the left protruding part (A in the figure) of the XSCF mount with the
frame guide of the CPU memory unit lower to install the XSCF mount. Then,
fix it with two screws (B in the figure).
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
131
Figure 7-52
Installing the XSCF mount (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B
CPU memory unit)
A
6.
132
B
Install the XSCF board.
- For the SPARC M10-4 with FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Insert the XSCF board into guides at the two locations (A in the figure) on the
mount (B in the figure), and push the right lever of the mount about 5 mm (0.2
in.) to the right (C in the figure) to attach (E in the figure) the connector unit (D
in the figure). Then, fix it with one screw (F in the figure).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-53
Installing the XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
A
E
B
C
D
F
- For the SPARC M10-4S with FRAME-A CPU memory unit
Insert the XSCF board into the left guide (A in the figure), and press down the
right connector unit (B in the figure) to attach the connector. Then, fix it with
two screws.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
133
Figure 7-54
Installing the XSCF board (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
A
B
7.
134
Attach the rear cover with two screws from the upper part of the rear side of
the CPU memory unit lower.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-55
Screws for rear cover
A
8.
Install the eight screws at both ends of the XSCF cable connection port on the
rear of the CPU memory unit lower.
For the SPARC M10-4 with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit and the SPARC
M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit, this step is not necessary.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
135
Figure 7-56
7.5.2
Screws for both ends of the XSCF cable connection ports (for the
SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
Installing the CPU memory unit upper
Note - A part of the procedure varies depending on the CPU memory unit type. To
determine the CPU memory unit type, check the label in Figure 7-2.
Install the CPU memory unit upper to the CPU memory unit lower. Perform
expansion using the same procedure.
1. Install the CPU memory unit upper on the CPU memory unit lower.
- When installing the CPU memory unit upper
Carefully install the CPU memory unit upper by setting the four guides (A in
the figure) of the CPU memory unit upper into the grooves (B in the figure) of
the CPU memory unit lower.
Note - Confirm that the levers on the left and right sides of the CPU memory unit upper are
closed.
136
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-57
Guide positions of the CPU memory unit upper
A
A
A
B
A
B
B
B
- When installing the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper
Carefully install the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper by setting the
two guides (A in the figure) of the filler unit in the groove (B in the figure) of
the CPU memory unit lower.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
137
Figure 7-58
Guide positions of the filler unit for the CPU memory unit upper
A
A
B
B
2.
138
Install the CPU memory unit upper by holding it down from the center where
the label "PUSH" is applied, and then push it into place.
Firmly push the unit so that there is no space between the CPU memory unit
upper and the frame of the CPU memory unit lower.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-59
3.
Position where the CPU memory unit upper is pushed
Connect, to the CPU memory unit upper, the four right and left PCIe cables
connecting the CPU memory units upper and lower.
While pressing the pin that locks the PCIe cable, insert it vertically.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
139
Note - Of the two PCIe cables on the right side, also install the one (short) cable on the rear of
the CPU memory unit lower.
4.
Install the right- and left-side guides.
Each guide has four clips. Install the guides using the clips, and slide each guide
while pushing its lock.
Note - Be careful not to damage the PCIe cable when installing the left- and right-side guides.
Figure 7-60
140
Positions of the clips on the left- and right-side guides (for the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-61
Positions of the clips on the left- and right-side guides (for the
SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit)
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
141
Figure 7-62
142
CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips on the side guide
(for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A CPU memory unit)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-63
CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips on the side guide
(for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU memory unit)
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
143
Figure 7-64
144
Filler unit of the CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips
on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S with a FRAME-A
CPU memory unit)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 7-65
Filler unit of the CPU memory unit upper and positions of the clips
on the side guide (for the SPARC M10-4S with a FRAME-B CPU
memory unit)
5.
Install the top-side cover of the CPU memory unit.
6.
Install the CPU memory unit lower in the chassis.
For details, see "7.5.3 Installing the CPU memory unit lower."
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
145
7.5.3
Installing the CPU memory unit lower
1.
Install the CPU memory unit upper or a filler unit for a CPU memory unit
upper.
For details, see "7.5.2 Installing the CPU memory unit upper."
2.
Insert the CPU memory unit lower into the chassis while supporting it from
below with one hand.
3.
Raise the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit lower to secure it.
Note - If the CPU memory unit lower is inserted as far as it will go, it may not be possible to
lift the lever. Lift the lever just before the CPU memory unit lower hits the rear and then
push it fully home.
7.5.4
Restoring the chassis
1.
If a crossbar unit was mounted, install the mounting frame and then tighten
the three screws.
2.
If any crossbar units were mounted, reinstall all of them.
For details, see "9.5 Installing a Crossbar Unit."
3.
Install all the PCIe card cassettes.
For details, see "13.6.2 Installing a PCI Express card cassette."
Note - Reinstall the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to the notes
that you made prior to the start of maintenance.
4.
Connect all the cables for the external interface.
The cables to be connected are as follows.
■
■
146
Interface cable connected to the PCIe card
Crossbar cables (If equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx
is used, connect them in step 6.)
■
XSCF BB control cable
■
XSCF DUAL control cable
■
XSCF-LAN cable
■
Serial cable
■
LAN cable
■
SAS cable
■
USB cable
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - Reinstall the cables in the correct positions by referring to the notes you made before
starting maintenance.
5.
Lift the cable support to fix it.
For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support."
If you are not using equipment rack model 26xx or equipment rack model 16xx,
the procedure ends here. You do not have to perform step 6.
6.
Connect the crossbar cables to the cable support.
Perform this procedure only when equipment rack model 26xx or equipment
rack model 16xx is used. The procedure may vary depending on the model of
the equipment rack.
Procedure when equipment rack model 26xx is used
a. Remove the hook-and-loop fastener of the crossbar cables from the cable
holder.
b. Remove the screw securing the cable holder, and then rotate the cable
holder through 180 degrees to install it on the supporting column at the
rear of the rack.
c. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit.
d. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable
support.
Note - Connect the crossbar cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that
you made before the start of maintenance.
Procedure when equipment rack model 16xx is used
a. Remove the crossbar cables from the hook-and-loop fastener installed on
the supporting column on the rear of the rack.
b. Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit.
c. Use the hook-and-loop fastener to fix the crossbar cables to the cable
support.
Note - Connect the crossbar cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that
you made before the start of maintenance.
7.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after a CPU memory
unit is replaced, expanded, or reduced. The restoration procedure differs depending
on the maintenance type as follows:
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
147
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
7.6.1
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical
partition is powered on.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
148
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "3.3.5
7.6.2
Checking log information."
5.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance
is mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
6.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
When the system is configured without a hardware RAID
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
149
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
5.
Checking log information."
Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose
XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (without crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (with crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode.
6.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is
operating normally after maintenance.
If there is no problem, nothing is displayed.
XSCF> showstatus
7.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
8.
Start the system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
9.
Close the rack door.
When the system is configured with a hardware RAID
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
150
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
5.
Checking log information."
Execute the setpparparam command to deactivate the Autoboot function of
the control domain.
In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot.
XSCF> setpparparam -p 0 -s bootscript "setenv auto-boot? false"
6.
Execute the setpparmode command to deactivate the Autoboot function of
the guest domain.
In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot.
XSCF> setpparmode -p 0 -m guestboot=off
7.
Start the system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
8.
The ok prompt appears.
9.
Enable the RAID volume to check the status.
For details, see "14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
10. Execute the setpparparam command to activate the Autoboot function of the
control domain.
In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot.
XSCF> setpparparam -p 0 -s bootscript "setenv auto-boot? true"
11. Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose
XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (without crossbar box)
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
151
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (with crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode.
12. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is
operating normally after maintenance.
If there is no problem, nothing is displayed.
XSCF> showstatus
13. Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
14. Close the rack door.
7.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
When the system is configured without a hardware RAID
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis.
Proceed to step 4.
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
152
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting information
only when the CPU memory unit lower in a singe-chassis configuration has
been replaced.
If the CPU memory unit lower is has not been replaced, restoration is not
necessary. Proceed to step 5.
a. Log in to the XSCF shell.
Note - If you cannot log in with an XSCF user account and password, use the default user
account of the XSCF to log in to the XSCF. For details, see "6.3 Logging In to the XSCF" in
the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide.
b. Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting
information that has been saved with the dumpconfig command.
For details, see "10.9.3 Restoring XSCF setting information" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
XSCF> restoreconfig
c. Execute the version command to confirm the firmware version information.
If the version does not match the one before the replacement, update the
firmware.
For details, see "16.1.3 Updating firmware" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
5.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
6.
Checking log information."
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the CPU memory unit requiring
maintenance is normally recognized.
For a building block configuration, you do not have to execute the testsb
command. Proceed to step 7.
When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
153
XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0
7.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is
operating normally after maintenance.
If there is no problem, nothing is displayed.
XSCF> showstatus
8.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
9.
Execute the showdate command to confirm the XSCF time.
There is no need to set the time if the NTP server is set to the XSCF. Proceed to
step 11.
XSCF> showdate
10. If the XSCF time is different from the current time, execute the setdate
command to set the time.
Specify the time in either of the following formats:
yyyy.MM.DD-hh:mm:ss
year.month.day-hour (24-hour clock):minute:second
MMDDhhmmyyyy.ss
monthdayhour (24-hour clock) minuteyear.second
In the following example, "October 20, 2013 16:59:00" is specified.
XSCF> setdate -s 102016592013.00
11. Start the system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
12. Close the rack door.
When the system is configured with a hardware RAID
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
154
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis.
Proceed to step 4.
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting information
only when the CPU memory unit lower in a singe-chassis configuration has
been replaced.
If the CPU memory unit lower is has not been replaced, restoration is not
necessary. Proceed to step 5.
a. Log in to the XSCF shell.
Note - If you cannot log in with an XSCF user account and password, use the default user
account of the XSCF to log in to the XSCF. For details, see "6.3 Resetting the System" in the
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems Installation Guide.
b. Execute the restoreconfig command to restore the XSCF setting
information that has been saved with the dumpconfig command.
For details, see "6.3 Logging In to the XSCF" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
XSCF> restoreconfig
c. Execute the version command to confirm the firmware version information.
If the version does not match the one before the replacement, update the
firmware.
For details, see "16.1.3 Updating firmware" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10
Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
5.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
155
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
6.
Checking log information."
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the CPU memory unit requiring
maintenance is normally recognized.
For a building block configuration, you do not have to execute the testsb
command. Proceed to step 7.
When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0
7.
Execute the setpparparam command to deactivate the Autoboot function of
the control domain.
In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot.
XSCF> setpparparam -p 0 -s bootscript "setenv auto-boot? false"
8.
Execute the setpparmode command to deactivate the Autoboot function of
the guest domain.
In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot.
XSCF> setpparmode -p 0 -m guestboot=off
9.
Start the system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
10. The ok prompt appears.
11. Enable the RAID volume to check the status.
For details, see "14.2.11 Re-enabling a hardware RAID volume" in the Fujitsu
M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
12. Execute the setpparmode command to activate the Autoboot function of the
guest domain.
In the following example, PPAR-ID 0 is set for Auto boot.
XSCF> setpparmode -p 0 -m guestboot=on
13. Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the CPU memory unit is
operating normally after maintenance.
156
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
If there is no problem, nothing is displayed.
XSCF> showstatus
14. Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the hardware configuration
and the status of each CPU memory unit.
Confirm that no asterisk (*) is displayed in front of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
15. Execute the showdate command to confirm the XSCF time.
There is no need to set the time if the NTP server is set to the XSCF. Proceed to
step 17.
XSCF> showdate
16. If the XSCF time is different from the current time, execute the setdate
command to set the time.
Specify the time in either of the following formats:
yyyy.MM.DD-hh:mm:ss
year.month.day-hour (24-hour clock):minute:second
MMDDhhmmyyyy.ss
monthdayhour (24-hour clock) minuteyear.second
In the following example, "October 20, 2013 16:59:00" is specified.
XSCF> setdate -s 102016592013.00
17. Close the rack door.
Chapter 7
Maintaining the CPU Memory Units
157
158
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the memory mounted on the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. Memory can be replaced, expanded, and reduced.
■
Memory Configuration
8.1
■
Memory Configuration Rules
■
Before Maintaining Memory
■
Enabling the Removal of Memory
■
Removing Memory
■
Installing Memory
■
Restoring the System
Memory Configuration
This section describes the configuration and location of memory.
A maximum of 32 memory modules can be implemented in one CPU memory unit.
One chassis can contain two CPU memory units; the CPU memory unit upper and
lower. Therefore, the maximum number of memory modules that can be implemented
in one chassis is 64.
Figure 8-1 shows the memory locations and the memory groups of the CPU memory
unit lower, while Figure 8-2 shows those of the CPU memory unit upper.
159
Figure 8-1
Memory locations (CPU memory unit lower)
CMUL
(15) (16) (13) (14) (7) (8) (5) (6)
CPU#0
(2) (1) (4) (3) (10) (9) (12) (11)
(27) (28) (25) (26) (19) (20) (17) (18)
CPU#1
(22) (21) (24) (23) (30) (29) (32) (31)
Front
160
Location number
Component
Group
1
Memory (CMUL/MEM#00A)
A
2
Memory (CMUL/MEM#00B)
B
3
Memory (CMUL/MEM#01A)
A
4
Memory (CMUL/MEM#01B)
B
5
Memory (CMUL/MEM#02A)
A
6
Memory (CMUL/MEM#02B)
B
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Location number
Component
Group
7
Memory (CMUL/MEM#03A)
A
8
Memory (CMUL/MEM#03B)
B
9
Memory (CMUL/MEM#04A)
A
10
Memory (CMUL/MEM#04B)
B
11
Memory (CMUL/MEM#05A)
A
12
Memory (CMUL/MEM#05B)
B
13
Memory (CMUL/MEM#06A)
A
14
Memory (CMUL/MEM#06B)
B
15
Memory (CMUL/MEM#07A)
A
16
Memory (CMUL/MEM#07B)
B
17
Memory (CMUL/MEM#10A)
A
18
Memory (CMUL/MEM#10B)
B
19
Memory (CMUL/MEM#11A)
A
20
Memory (CMUL/MEM#11B)
B
21
Memory (CMUL/MEM#12A)
A
22
Memory (CMUL/MEM#12B)
B
23
Memory (CMUL/MEM#13A)
A
24
Memory (CMUL/MEM#13B)
B
25
Memory (CMUL/MEM#14A)
A
26
Memory (CMUL/MEM#14B)
B
27
Memory (CMUL/MEM#15A)
A
28
Memory (CMUL/MEM#15B)
B
29
Memory (CMUL/MEM#16A)
A
30
Memory (CMUL/MEM#16B)
B
31
Memory (CMUL/MEM#17A)
A
32
Memory (CMUL/MEM#17B)
B
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
161
Figure 8-2
Memory locations (CPU memory unit upper)
CMUU
(47) (48) (45) (46) (39) (40) (37) (38)
CPU#0
(34) (33) (36) (35) (42) (41) (44) (43)
(59) (60) (57) (58) (51) (52) (49) (50)
CPU#1
(54) (53) (56) (55) (62) (61) (64) (63)
Front
162
Location number
Component
Group
33
Memory (CMUU/MEM#00A)
A
34
Memory (CMUU/MEM#00B)
B
35
Memory (CMUU/MEM#01A)
A
36
Memory (CMUU/MEM#01B)
B
37
Memory (CMUU/MEM#02A)
A
38
Memory (CMUU/MEM#02B)
B
39
Memory (CMUU/MEM#03A)
A
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
8.2
Location number
Component
Group
40
Memory (CMUU/MEM#03B)
B
41
Memory (CMUU/MEM#04A)
A
42
Memory (CMUU/MEM#04B)
B
43
Memory (CMUU/MEM#05A)
A
44
Memory (CMUU/MEM#05B)
B
45
Memory (CMUU/MEM#06A)
A
46
Memory (CMUU/MEM#06B)
B
47
Memory (CMUU/MEM#07A)
A
48
Memory (CMUU/MEM#07B)
B
49
Memory (CMUU/MEM#10A)
A
50
Memory (CMUU/MEM#10B)
B
51
Memory (CMUU/MEM#11A)
A
52
Memory (CMUU/MEM#11B)
B
53
Memory (CMUU/MEM#12A)
A
54
Memory (CMUU/MEM#12B)
B
55
Memory (CMUU/MEM#13A)
A
56
Memory (CMUU/MEM#13B)
B
57
Memory (CMUU/MEM#14A)
A
58
Memory (CMUU/MEM#14B)
B
59
Memory (CMUU/MEM#15A)
A
60
Memory (CMUU/MEM#15B)
B
61
Memory (CMUU/MEM#16A)
A
62
Memory (CMUU/MEM#16B)
B
63
Memory (CMUU/MEM#17A)
A
64
Memory (CMUU/MEM#17B)
B
Memory Configuration Rules
This section describes the memory mounting rules and the method for checking
memory information.
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
163
8.2.1
Memory mounting rules
Install the memory in accordance with the following rules:
■
Mount memory in units of eight modules.
■
■
■
Within a unit of eight modules, all the memory modules must be of the same
capacity and rank.
For memory for one CPU, use only R-DIMM (Registered DIMM: 8 GB/16 GB/32
GB) or only LR-DIMM (Load Reduced DIMM: 64 GB).
First mount memory group A and then mount memory group B.
Figure 8-3 shows the mounting locations of all the memory modules. Each
eight-module unit of mounted memory is indicated by letters a to f. Table 8-1, Table
8-2 and Table 8-3 list the supported memory installation configurations. The memory
mounting locations may vary depending on the number of mounted CPU memory
units. Refer to this figure and table when you expand or reduce memory.
As for the mounting order of memory group B, give priority to using a uniform
memory type of either R-DIMM or LR-DIMM for one CPU over the memory
mounting patterns in Table 8-1, Table 8-2, and Table 8-3.
164
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
MEM#10B
MEM#10A
MEM#11B
MEM#11A
MEM#14B
MEM#14A
MEM#15B
MEM#15A
MEM#02B
MEM#02A
MEM#03B
MEM#03A
MEM#06B
MEM#06A
MEM#07B
MEM#07A
MEM#10B
MEM#10A
MEM#11B
MEM#11A
MEM#14B
MEM#14A
MEM#15B
MEM#15A
CMUU
Chapter 8
MEM#13A
MEM#16B
MEM#16A
MEM#17B
MEM#17A
MEM#01A
MEM#04B
MEM#04A
MEM#05B
MEM#05A
MEM#13A
MEM#16B
MEM#16A
MEM#17B
MEM#17A
MEM#13B
CPU#1
MEM#01B
g
d
MEM#13B
CPU#0
MEM#12A
c
MEM#00A
f
Front
MEM#12A
CPU#1
MEM#12B
MEM#05A
MEM#05B
MEM#04A
MEM#04B
MEM#01A
MEM#01B
MEM#00A
MEM#00B
CPU#0
MEM#00B
CMUL
MEM#12B
MEM#02B
MEM#02A
MEM#03B
MEM#03A
MEM#06B
MEM#06A
MEM#07B
MEM#07A
Figure 8-3
Mounting locations and units of memory
a
e
b
h
Front
Maintaining the Memory
165
When only the CPU memory unit lower is mounted
Table 8-1
Memory mounting configurations (CMUL only)
Number of memory
modules
Mounted memory
8
a in Figure 8-3
-
-
-
16
a in Figure 8-3
b in Figure 8-3
-
-
24
a in Figure 8-3
b in Figure 8-3
e in Figure 8-3
-
32
a in Figure 8-3
b in Figure 8-3
e in Figure 8-3
f in Figure 8-3
When both the CPU memory unit lower and the CPU memory unit upper
are mounted
Table 8-2
Memory mounting patterns (CMUL and CMUU)
Number of
memory
modules
Mounted memory
8
a in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
16
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
-
-
-
24
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
-
-
32
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
-
40
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
48
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
-
-
56
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
g in
Figure 8-3
-
64
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
g in
Figure 8-3
h in
Figure 8-3
When expanding a CPU memory unit upper to a chassis in which only a
CPU memory unit lower is mounted
If you mount memory by expanding a CPU memory unit upper to a chassis in which
only a CPU memory unit lower is mounted, you do not have to remove the memory
mounted on the CPU memory unit lower.
166
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Install it by observing the mounting configurations shown in either Table 8-3or Table
8-2.
Table 8-3
Memory mounting configurations (CMUL and expanded CMUU)
Number of
memory
modules
Mounted memory
8
a in
Figure 8-3
-
16
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
-
-
-
24
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
-
-
32
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
-
-
-
-
40
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
-
-
-
48
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
-
-
56
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
g in
Figure 8-3
-
64
a in
Figure 8-3
b in
Figure 8-3
e in
Figure 8-3
f in Figure
8-3
c in
Figure 8-3
d in
Figure 8-3
g in
Figure 8-3
h in
Figure 8-3
8.2.2
Checking memory information
Check the type and size of the memory by using the showhardconf command of the
XSCF firmware.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the memory information.
The capacity and rank of the memory are displayed.
XSCF> showhardconf
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------MBU Status:Normal; Ver:2004h; Serial:USDA-P00007 ;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA20366-B10X 002AB/LGA-MBU -01 ;
+ Power_Supply_System: Dual ;
+ Memory_Size:32 GB;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial: 00010448;
+ Freq:2.800 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
MEM#00A Status:Normal;
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9 0000-85A8EFD9;
+ Type:01; Size:4 GB;
MEM#01A Status:Normal;
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
167
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9
+ Type:01; Size:4 GB;
MEM#02A Status:Normal;
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9
+ Type:01; Size:4 GB;
MEM#03A Status:Normal;
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DH0-YH9
+ Type:01; Size:4 GB;
Figure 8-4
0000-85A8EF57;
0000-85A8EF65;
0000-85A8EE2C;
Viewing memory information
MEM#00A Status:Normal;
Memory slot
+ Code:ce8002M393B5270DHO-YH9
0000-83AE9A65;
+ Type:04; Size:8 GB;
Capacity and rank
04: R-DIMM (8GB 1rank)
07: R-DIMM (16GB 2rank)
09: R-DIMM (32GB 4rank)
47: LR-DIMM (64GB 8rank)
8.3
Before Maintaining Memory
This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the memory, as well as
some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
8.3.1
Types of maintenance
Table 8-4 lists the types of memory maintenance. For the definition of maintenance,
see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 8-4
Types of maintenance for memory
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Single-chassis configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
168
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 8-4
Types of maintenance for memory (continued)
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Supported (*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
*1:
*2:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
8.3.2
Maintenance flow
Table 8-5 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for memory. The
procedure for expanding memory is the same as that for installing memory. The
procedure for reducing memory is the same as that for removing memory.
Table 8-5
8.3.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
Expansion
Reduction
1
Preparation
8.4
8.4
8.4
2
Removing a CPU memory unit
7.4
7.4
7.4
3
Removing memory
8.5
-
8.5
4
Installing memory
8.6
8.6
-
5
Installing a CPU memory unit
7.5
7.5
7.5
6
Restoring the system
8.7
8.7
8.7
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when replacing memory:
■
When you replace a memory module, make sure that you install the new module
in the same position as the original one.
8.3.4
Precautions for installation
Note the following points when expanding memory:
■
Observe the memory installation rules when you expand memory. For details, see
"8.2.1 Memory mounting rules."
■
Apply XCP 2080 or later when you expand 64 GB memory.
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
169
8.3.5
Precautions for removal
Note the following points when removing memory:
Observe the memory installation rules when you remove memory. For details, see
"8.2.1 Memory mounting rules."
■
8.4
Enabling the Removal of Memory
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal
of memory. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as
follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
8.4.1
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
170
Checking log information."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred.
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the building block, in which the memory requiring maintenance is
mounted, from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
8.4.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred.
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
171
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
8.4.3
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
Note - When you add or remove CPU memory units, confirm that no error has occurred.
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
172
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
8.5
Removing Memory
This section describes the procedure for removing memory. Perform reduction using
the same procedure.
Enable the removal of the memory before you attempting to remove it. For details,
see "8.4 Enabling the Removal of Memory."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
8.5.1
Accessing memory
1.
Perform the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the CPU
memory unit.
For details, see "7.4.1 Accessing a CPU memory unit."
2.
Remove the CPU memory unit.
To remove the memory mounted on the CPU memory unit upper, see steps 1
through 3 as described in "7.4.2 Removing the CPU memory unit lower."
To remove the memory mounted on the CPU memory unit lower, see "7.4.2
Removing the CPU memory unit lower" and steps 1 through 10 in "7.4.3
Removing the CPU memory unit upper."
8.5.2
Removing memory
1.
Open the clip of the memory slot outwards and remove the memory by pulling
it straight up.
Note - Place the removed memory on a grounded static-removal ESD mat.
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
173
Figure 8-5
8.6
Removing memory
Installing Memory
This section describes the procedure for installing a memory module. Perform
expansion using the same procedure.
8.6.1
Installing memory
1.
Place the memory module by aligning the notched section with the corresponding
part of the memory slot connector.
2.
Push the memory module into the slot evenly.
Note - Confirm that the clip of the memory slot has returned to its original position.
174
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
8.6.2
Restoring the chassis
1.
Install the CPU memory unit.
If you have installed the memory of the CPU memory unit upper, see "7.5.2
Installing the CPU memory unit upper."
If you have installed the memory of the CPU memory unit lower, see "7.5.2
Installing the CPU memory unit upper" and "7.5.3 Installing the CPU memory
unit lower."
2.
8.7
Restore the chassis.
For details, see "7.5.4 Restoring the chassis."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after replacement,
addition, and removal of memory. The restoration procedure differs depending on
the maintenance type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
8.7.1
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
175
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical
partition is powered on.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
8.7.2
Checking log information."
5.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the memory requiring maintenance is
mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
6.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
176
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "6.1
Command."
3.
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
5.
Checking log information."
Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose
XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (without crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (with crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode.
6.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with
the memory after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
7.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
8.
Start the system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
9.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 8
Maintaining the Memory
177
8.7.3
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Start the system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
3.
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the memory requiring maintenance
is recognized.
XSCF> testsb -a
4.
178
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 9
Maintaining the Crossbar Units
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar units mounted on
a SPARC M10-4S.
■
Configuration of the Crossbar Units
9.1
■
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit
■
Removing a Crossbar Unit
■
Installing a Crossbar Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Crossbar Units
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the crossbar units.
The crossbar units of the SPARC M10-4S are connected to the crossbar units of other
SPARC M10-4S units or to a crossbar box for system extension. Two crossbar units
are mounted on a SPARC M10-4S. When performing maintenance, perform the work
one unit at a time.
179
Figure 9-1
Location of crossbar units
㩿㪈㪀
㩿㪉㪀
9.2
Location number
Component
1
Crossbar unit (XBU#0)
2
Crossbar unit (XBU#1)
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit
This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the crossbar units.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
9.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 9-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar units. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
180
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 9-1
Types of maintenance for the crossbar unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Supported (*)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
*: It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
9.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 9-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar units.
Table 9-2
9.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
9.3
2
Removing the crossbar units
9.4
3
Installing the crossbar unit
9.5
4
Restoring the system
9.6
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar
Unit
This section describes preparation that must be completed prior to removing a
crossbar unit. The procedure for the preparation varies depending on the maintenance
type, as follows:
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
Chapter 9
Maintaining the Crossbar Units
181
9.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the building block, in which the memory requiring maintenance is
mounted, from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
9.3.2
182
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
9.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
Chapter 9
Maintaining the Crossbar Units
183
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
9.4
Removing a Crossbar Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing a crossbar unit.
Enable the removal of the crossbar unit before attempting to remove it. For details,
see "9.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "5.4 Stopping
the Entire System."
9.4.1
Accessing a crossbar unit
1.
Lower the cable support.
For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support."
Note - If the crossbar cables are fixed to the cable support with the hook-and-loop fastener,
remove the hook-and-loop fastener.
2.
Remove all the crossbar cables connected to the crossbar units requiring
maintenance.
Note - Make a note of the positions of the crossbar cables before disconnecting them to
ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
9.4.2
Removing a crossbar unit
1.
184
Loosen the two screws securing the crossbar unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 9-2
2.
Location of screws securing crossbar units
Open the eject levers (A in the figure) upwards and downwards, respectively,
and then pull the crossbar unit out of the CPU memory unit.
Chapter 9
Maintaining the Crossbar Units
185
Figure 9-3
Opening the eject levers
A
3.
Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and carefully remove it
from the mounting frame.
Note - Place the removed crossbar unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
9.5
Installing a Crossbar Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a crossbar unit.
Note - When mounting a crossbar unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis
and crossbar unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly
arranged in lines. If a crossbar unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the
chassis or crossbar unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to
prevent any pin from being bent.
186
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
9.5.1
9.5.2
Installing a crossbar unit
1.
Open the eject levers of the crossbar unit.
2.
Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and then carefully insert
it into the mounting frame.
3.
Close the eject levers and tighten the two screws securing the crossbar unit.
Restoring the chassis
1.
Connect all the crossbar cables to the crossbar unit.
Note - Connect the crossbar cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that
you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
9.6
Lift the cable support to fix it.
For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the
crossbar units. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type
as follows:
■
Active/Cold maintenance
9.6.1
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Chapter 9
Maintaining the Crossbar Units
187
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical
partition is powered on.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
9.6.2
Checking log information."
5.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the CPU memory unit requiring maintenance
is mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
6.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
188
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "6.1
Command."
3.
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
5.
Checking log information."
Switch the mode switches of the master chassis and those chassis whose
XSCFs are in the standby state to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (without crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#00 and #01 to Locked mode.
- For a building block configuration (with crossbar box)
Switch the mode switches of BB-ID#80 and #81 to Locked mode.
6.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with
the crossbar units after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
7.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
8.
Start the system.
For details, see "6.4.1 Starting the system with an XSCF command" or "6.4.2
Starting the system from the operation panel."
9.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 9
Maintaining the Crossbar Units
189
9.6.3
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
190
Checking log information."
5.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
6.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 10
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the power supply units
mounted in the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
■
Configuration of the Power Supply Units
10.1
■
Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit
■
Removing a Power Supply Unit
■
Installing a Power Supply Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Power Supply
Units
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the power supply units.
The power supply units feed power to the individual components. The components
can have the 1+1 redundant configuration. Active/hot maintenance can be performed.
191
Figure 10-1
Location of power supply unit
(1)
10.2
(2)
Location number
Component
1
Power supply unit (PSU#0)
2
Power supply unit (PSU#1)
Before Maintaining a Power Supply
Unit
This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the power supply units,
as well as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
10.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 10-1 lists the types of maintenance for the power supply units. For the
192
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
definition of maintenance, see "4.3
Table 10-1
Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Types of maintenance for the power supply unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Single-chassis configuration
Supported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
Supported (*2)
Supported (*3)
Supported
Supported
Supported
*1:
*2:
*3:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration.
It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
10.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 10-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the power supply
units.
Table 10-2
10.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
10.3
2
Removing a power supply unit
10.4
3
Installing a power supply unit
10.5
4
Restoring the system
10.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when replacing a power supply unit:
■
There are two power supply units. Thus, the system can continue operating even
if one of the units fails. Do not, however, operate the system for an extended
period while one unit has failed.
■
■
When replacing multiple power supply units, replace one unit at a time. If
redundancy of the power supply unit cannot be assured, then system-stopped
maintenance must be performed.
Do not force push the power supply unit into its slot. Using excessive force may
damage the component or the chassis.
Chapter 10
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
193
10.3
Enabling the Removal of a Power
Supply Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal
of a power supply unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
10.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
Note - Active/hot maintenance is supported only for a redundant configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
194
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "5.1
Command."
10.3.2
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the chassis, in which the power supply unit requiring maintenance is
mounted, from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
Chapter 10
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
195
10.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
For a single-chassis configuration
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the physical partition
requiring maintenance is powered off.
XSCF> showpparstatus -a
7.
Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
For a building-block configuration
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
4.
196
Checking log information."
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
10.3.4
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
Chapter 10
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
197
10.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis.
Proceed to step 7.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
10.4
Removing a Power Supply Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing a power supply unit. Enable the
removal of the power supply unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see
"10.3 Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit."
198
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
10.4.1
Accessing a power supply unit
1.
10.4.2
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
Removing a power supply unit
1.
Remove the power cord from the power supply unit requiring maintenance.
2.
Loosen the screws securing the power supply unit and open the lever.
Figure 10-2
Screws securing power supply unit
3.
Hold the lever and pull the power supply unit out of the chassis.
4.
Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and remove it
carefully from its slot.
Chapter 10
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
199
Note - Place the removed power supply unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
10.5
Installing a Power Supply Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a power supply unit.
10.5.1
Installing a power supply unit
1.
Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and insert it
carefully into its slot.
Note - Do not forcibly push the power supply unit into its slot. Using excessive force may
damage the component or the chassis.
10.5.2
10.6
2.
Firmly push the power supply unit into its mounting position.
3.
Close the lever and then tighten the screws.
4.
Connect the power cords to the power supply unit.
Restoring the chassis
1.
Connect the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis requiring
maintenance.
2.
Confirm that the LED (green) on the power supply unit is blinking.
3.
Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a power
supply unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as
follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
200
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
10.6.1
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with
the power supply unit after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
3.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
4.
10.6.2
Close the rack door.
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
Chapter 10
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
201
For details, see "6.1
Command."
10.6.3
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
3.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the power supply unit requiring maintenance
is mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
4.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Hot maintenance
For a single-chassis configuration
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
4.
Close the rack door.
For a building-block configuration
10.6.4
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
202
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
10.6.5
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis.
Proceed to step 3.
3.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
4.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 10
Maintaining the Power Supply Units
203
204
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 11
Maintaining the Fan Units
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the fan units mounted in the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
■
Configuration of the Fan Units
11.1
■
Before Maintaining a Fan Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit
■
Removing a Fan Unit
■
Installing a Fan Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Fan Units
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the fan units.
Five fan units are mounted in each chassis. Each fan unit has two cooling fans that
cool the components in the chassis.
If a fault occurs with a cooling fan during system operation, the XSCF detects the
error. However, the system can continue operating because the fans have a
redundant configuration.
205
Figure 11-1
Location of fan units
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
11.2
Location number
Component
1
Fan unit (FANU#0)
2
Fan unit (FANU#1)
3
Fan unit (FANU#2)
4
Fan unit (FANU#3)
5
Fan unit (FANU#4)
Before Maintaining a Fan Unit
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the fan units, as well
as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
206
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
11.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 11-1 lists the types of maintenance for the fan units. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 11-1
Types of maintenance for fan unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Single-chassis configuration
Supported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
Supported
Supported (*2)
Supported
Supported
Supported
*1:
*2:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
11.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 11-2 shows the maintenance procedure for the fan units.
Table 11-2
11.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
11.3
2
Removing a fan unit
11.4
3
Installing a fan unit
11.5
4
Restoring the system
11.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when replacing a fan unit:
■
When replacing multiple fan units, replace one unit at a time. If redundancy of the
fan units cannot be preserved, system-stopped maintenance must be performed.
■
The cooling fans have a redundant configuration. Thus, the system can continue
operating even if one of the fans in the fan units fails. Avoid operating the system
with a faulty fan for an extended period and replace the fan unit containing the
failed fan as soon as possible.
Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units
207
11.3
Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a
fan unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as
follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
11.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
208
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
11.3.2
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the chassis, in which the fan unit requiring maintenance is mounted,
from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
11.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
For a single-chassis configuration
1.
Open the rack door.
Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units
209
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Execute the showpparstatus command to confirm that the physical partition
requiring maintenance is powered off.
XSCF> showpparstatus -a
7.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
For a building-block configuration
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
210
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "5.1
Command."
11.3.4
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
11.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
The procedure in the case of system-stopped maintenance is same for the building
block configuration and single-chassis configuration.
1. Open the rack door.
Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units
211
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis.
Proceed to step 7.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
11.4
Removing a Fan Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing a fan unit. Complete the necessary
preparations prior to attempting the removal. For details, see "11.3 Enabling the
Removal of a Fan Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
212
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
11.4.1
Accessing a fan unit
1.
11.4.2
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
Removing a fan unit
1.
Pull out the fan unit while raising its lever.
Figure 11-2
2.
Lever of fan unit
Carefully remove the fan unit from its slot.
Note - Place the removed fan unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units
213
11.5
Installing a Fan Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a fan unit.
11.5.1
Installing a fan unit
1.
Carefully insert the fan unit into its slot.
Note - Do not force the fan unit into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the
component or the chassis.
2.
Push the fan unit fully home.
Note - Check that the fan unit is fully inserted and secured.
11.5.2
Restoring the chassis
1.
11.6
Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a fan
unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
214
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
11.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with
the fan unit after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
3.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
4.
11.6.2
Close the rack door.
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the fan unit requiring maintenance is
mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
4.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units
215
11.6.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
For a single-chassis configuration
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
4.
Close the rack door.
For a building-block configuration
11.6.4
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
216
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
11.6.5
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis.
Proceed to step 3.
3.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
4.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units
217
218
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the internal disks mounted in
the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. An internal disk can be replaced, expanded, or reduced.
■
Configuration of the Internal Disks
12.1
■
Before Maintaining an Internal Disk
■
Enabling the Removal of an Internal Disk
■
Removing an Internal Disk
■
Installing an Internal Disk
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Internal Disks
This section describes the configuration and locations of the internal disks.
The chassis provides eight slots for mounting internal disks. The system storage can
be expanded by installing extra hard disk drives (HDDs) or solid state drives (SSDs)
in these slots.
219
Figure 12-1
Location of internal disks
(1) (2) (3)
12.1.1
(4) (5) (6)
Location number
Component
1
Internal disk (HDD#0)
2
Internal disk (HDD#1)
3
Internal disk (HDD#2)
4
Internal disk (HDD#3)
5
Internal disk (HDD#4)
6
Internal disk (HDD#5)
7
Internal disk (HDD#6)
8
Internal disk (HDD#7)
(7)
(8)
Identification of disk slot
To perform active replacement of a disk drive, you need to know the physical device
name or logical device name of the drive to be installed or removed. When a disk
error is likely to occur or occurs in the system, normally you can check messages
regarding a disk that is likely to cause or has caused an error from the system
console. This information is recorded also in the /var/adm/messages file.
These error messages normally indicate the internal disk drives in which the errors
have occurred by their physical or logical device names. In addition, depending on
the application, the slot number of the disk may be reported.
The procedure to display the mounting position information of the HDD varies
220
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
depending on OS.
- For Oracle Solaris 11
For details, see "Using the format command (Oracle Solaris 11)" or "Using the
diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 11)."
- For Oracle Solaris 10
For details, see "Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 10)."
Using the format command (Oracle Solaris 11)
1.
Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the serial number of the
CMUL of the chassis for which mounting location information is to be displayed.
XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081238017; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
Partition#1 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081238017;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123001Y1 ;
* BB#00 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3
/7060911
+ Memory_Size:128 GB;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321144;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00322957;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081230011;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123203N0 ;
* BB#01 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3
/7060911
+ Memory_Size:128 GB;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00320804;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321030;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
MEM#00A Status:Normal;
+ Code:2c800118KSF1G72PZ-1G6E1 4531-1A94229F;
+ Type:04; Size:8 GB;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
2.
;
;
Execute the format command to confirm the physical disk slot.
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
221
In the following example, (1) to (5) indicate the following:
(1): The logical path name of the disk.
(2): The disk is mounted in the HDD00 slot of BB#01.
(3): The disk is mounted in the HDD01 slot of BB#01.
(4): The disk is mounted in the HDD00 slot of BB#00.
(5): The disk is mounted in the HDD01 slot of BB#00.
# format
Searching for disks...done
AVAILABLE DISK SELECTIONS:
0. c2t50000394281B5312d0 <-- (1)
/pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b5312,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD00/disk <-- (2)
(*1)
1. c2t50000394281B59D6d0 <-- (1)
/pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b59d6,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD01/disk <-- (3)
2. c0t500003942823C8C6d0 <-- (1)
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w500003942823c8c6,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD00/disk <-- (4)
(*2)
3. c0t50000394281B517Ad0 <-- (1)
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000394281b517a,0
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD01/disk <-- (5)
Specify disk (enter its number):
sec
sec
sec
sec
*1: The last four digits of the BB#1_CMUL serial number
*2: The last four digits of the BB#0_CMUL serial number
Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 11)
1.
Execute the showhardconf command to confirm the CMUL serial number of
the chassis that indicates the mounting position information.
XSCF> showhardconf
SPARC M10-4S;
+ Serial:2081238017; Operator_Panel_Switch:Service;
+ System_Power:Off; System_Phase:Cabinet Power Off;
Partition#0 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
Partition#1 PPAR_Status:Powered Off;
BB#00 Status:Normal; Role:Master; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081238017;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123001Y1 ;
222
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
* BB#00 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3
/7060911
+ Memory_Size:128 GB;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321144;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00322957;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------BB#01 Status:Normal; Role:Standby; Ver:2044h; Serial:2081230011;
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D202 A1
;
+ Power_Supply_System: ;
+ Memory_Size:256 GB;
CMUL Status:Normal; Ver:0101h; Serial:PP123203N0 ;
* BB#01 CMUL serial
+ FRU-Part-Number:CA07361-D941 C3
/7060911
+ Memory_Size:128 GB;
CPU#0 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00320804;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
CPU#1 Status:Normal; Ver:4142h; Serial:00321030;
+ Freq:3.000 GHz; Type:0x10;
+ Core:16; Strand:2;
MEM#00A Status:Normal;
+ Code:2c800118KSF1G72PZ-1G6E1 4531-1A94229F;
+ Type:04; Size:8 GB;
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
2.
;
;
Execute the diskinfo(1M) command to check the physical disk slot.
(1) to (4) in the example below specify the following:
(1): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD0 of BB#01.
(2): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD1 of BB#01.
(3): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD0 of BB#00.
(4): The device path name and logical path name of the disk mounted on the
HDD1 of BB#00.
# diskinfo
D:devchassis-path
----------------------------------------------------------/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD0
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD1
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD2
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD3
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD4
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD5
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD6
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB0/CMUL/HDD7
Chapter 12
c:occupant-compdev
------------------
Maintaining the Internal Disks
223
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD0
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD1
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD2
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD3
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD4
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD5
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD6
/dev/chassis/SYS/BB1/CMUL/HDD7
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD00/disk
c4t50000394281B5312d0 <-- (1)
(*1)
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD01/disk
c4t50000394281B59D6d0 <-- (2)
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD02
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD03
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD04
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD05
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD06
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d31bf/03N0_HDD07
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD00/disk
c2t500003942823C8C6d0 <-- (3)
(*2)
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD01/disk
c2t50000394281B517Ad0 <-- (4)
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD02
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD03
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD04
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD05
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD06
/dev/chassis/FUJITSU-BBEXP.500000e0e06d237f/01Y1_HDD07
-
-
-
*1: The last four digits of the BB#01_CMUL serial number
*2: The last four digits of the BB#00_CMUL serial number
Using the diskinfo command (Oracle Solaris 10)
1.
Execute the diskinfo command to check the physical disk slot and physical
system board.
(1) to (4) in the example below specify the following:
(1): The logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD0.
(2): The device path of the disk mounted on the HDD0 of LSB#0.
(3): The logical path name of the disk mounted on the HDD1.
(4): The device path of the disk mounted on the HDD1 of LSB#0.
# diskinfo -ap
Enclosure path:
Chassis Serial Number:
Chassis Model:
2081210007-physical-hba-0
2081210007-physical-hba-0
ORCL,SPARC64-X
Enclosure path:
Chassis Serial Number:
Chassis Model:
/dev/es/ses0
500000e0e06d233f
FUJITSU-BBEXP
224
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Label
Disk name
Vendor
Product
Vers
-------- ---------------------- -------- -------------- ---HDD_0
c0t50000393D8289180d0
TOSHIBA MBF2600RC
3706 <-- (1)
Physical path
-------------------------------0: /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393D8289180,0<--(2)
* LSB#0
HDD_1
c0t50000393D82891D0d0
TOSHIBA MBF2600RC
3706 <-- (3)
Physical path
-------------------------------0: /pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393D82891D0,0<--(4)
* LSB#0
Device paths differ depending on the system configuration.
Table 12-1 lists examples of the device paths of logical system boards in SPARC
M10 systems.
This table can be used for mapping of the device paths of internal disk drives
and the logical system board numbers. The letters "WWN" in the table represents
the WWN assigned to the disk.
Table 12-1
Disk slot number
LSB number
Device path
LSB#0
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#1
/pci@8800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#2
/pci@9000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#3
/pci@9800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#4
/pci@a000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#5
/pci@a800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#6
/pci@b000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#7
/pci@b800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#8
/pci@c000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#9
/pci@c800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#10
/pci@d000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#11
/pci@d800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#12
/pci@e000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#13
/pci@e800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#14
/pci@f000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
LSB#15
/pci@f800/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0/iport@f/disk@wWWN,0
2.
Execute the showboards command to confirm the BB-ID of the chassis in
which the disk requiring maintenance is mounted.
Identify the BB-ID from the LSB number confirmed in step 1. The BB-ID of the
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
225
chassis requiring maintenance is indicated by the system board (PSB) number.
XSCF> showboards -a
PSB
PPAR-ID(LSB)
---- -----------00-0 00(00)
* BB#0
* LSB#0
01-0 00(01)
12.2
Assignment
----------Assigned
Pwr
---y
Conn
---y
Conf
---y
Test
------Passed
Fault
-------Normal
Assigned
y
y
y
Passed
Normal
Before Maintaining an Internal Disk
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the internal disks, as
well as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
12.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 12-2 lists the types of maintenance for the internal disks. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 12-2
Types of maintenance for internal disk
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Single-chassis configuration
Supported (*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
Supported (*2)
Supported (*3)
Supported
Supported
Supported
*1:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
*2: Supported only for internal disks of devices other than boot devices. If, however, the boot device has a redundant configuration
(RAID configuration), active/hot maintenance can be performed.
*3: It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
12.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 12-3 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the internal disks. The
procedure for expanding an internal disk is the same as that for installing an internal
disk. The procedure for reducing an internal disk is the same as that for removing an
internal disk.
226
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 12-3
12.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
Expansion
Reduction
1
Preparation
12.3
12.3
12.3
2
Removing an internal disk
12.4
-
12.4
3
Installing an internal disk
12.5
12.5
-
4
Restoring the system
12.6
12.6
12.6
Precautions for installation
Note the following points when expanding internal disks:
■
To expand an internal disk, remove the hard disk drive filler unit from the slot in
which you will install the internal disk.
■
12.2.4
Store the removed internal disk filler unit safely, such that it can be used again if
you subsequently reduce the internal disk.
Precautions for removal
Note the following points when removing internal disks:
■
When you reduce the internal disk, install the hard disk drive filler unit in the slot
from which you have removed the internal disk.
12.3
Enabling the Removal of an Internal
Disk
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing an
internal disk. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type
as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
227
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
12.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
Note - Unless the system has a redundant configuration, data on the hard disk drive will be
lost. Thus, perform this operation only after backing up the data on the hard disk drive. In
addition, active/hot maintenance of the boot device cannot be performed in a non-redundant
configuration.
Before performing maintenance, check the hardware configuration and software
configuration. For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
The procedure may vary depending on the configuration of the hard disk drive.
When the system is configured with a hardware RAID
Proceed only after checking the failed hard disk drive. For details, see "14.2.8
Checking the disk drive status" and "14.2.9 Checking for a failed disk drive" in the
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
When the system is configured with a software RAID
See your software manual.
When the system is configured without either a hardware RAID or software
RAID
To add an internal disk, perform the procedure up to step 2.
1. Open the rack door.
2.
Display the Oracle Solaris super-user prompt.
3.
Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to check the configuration of the internal
disk.
If you replace or reduce an internal disk, use the cfgadm -a command to check
the Ap_ID of the disk requiring maintenance and make a note of it. The Ap_ID
refers to a string such as "c4::dsk/c4t5000039428298FFEd0".
If you install an internal disk, use the cfgadm -a command to check the number
of disks mounted.
# cfgadm -a
228
4.
Stop all applications from using the internal disk.
5.
Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to release the internal disk requiring
maintenance from the system.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
# cfgadm -c unconfigure Ap_ID
6.
Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to blink the CHECK LED of the internal
disk requiring maintenance, and determine its location.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
# cfgadm -x led=fault,mode=blink Ap_ID
7.
Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to confirm that the internal disk requiring
maintenance is disconnected.
The disconnected internal disk is displayed as "unconfigured."
# cfgadm -a
12.3.2
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the chassis, in which the internal disk requiring maintenance is
mounted, from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
229
7.
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
12.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
For a single-chassis configuration
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
3.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
For a building-block configuration
12.3.4
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
3.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
230
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
3.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
12.3.5
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
3.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
4.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis.
Proceed to step 5.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
5.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
12.4
Removing an Internal Disk
This section describes the procedure for removing an internal disk. Perform
reduction using the same procedure.
Make the internal disk ready for removal before attempting to remove it. For details,
see "12.3 Enabling the Removal of an Internal Disk."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
231
12.4.1
Accessing an internal disk
1.
12.4.2
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
Removing an internal disk
1.
Push the knob on the internal disk to unlock it and then raise the lever to a
45-degree angle.
Figure 12-2
2.
Knob on internal disk
Hold the lever and pull out the internal disk by about 3 cm (1.2 in.)
Note - When performing active/hot maintenance, at this point wait until the motor stops
rotating (about 1 minute).
232
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 12-3
3.
Removing an internal disk
Carefully remove the internal disk from its slot.
Note - Place the removed internal disk on the grounded antistatic ESD mat.
4.
12.5
When reducing an internal disk, install the the internal disk filler unit in the
slot from which the disk was removed.
Installing an Internal Disk
This section describes the procedure for installing an internal disk. Perform
expansion using the same procedure.
12.5.1
Installing an internal disk
1.
When expanding an internal disk, remove the internal disk filler unit from the
slot in which the disk is to be installed.
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
233
2.
With the lever opened, hold the internal disk.
3.
Carefully insert the internal disk into the slot.
Note - Do not force the internal disk into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the
component or the chassis.
4.
Close the lever to secure the internal disk.
Note - Ensure that the internal disks are firmly inserted and secured.
12.5.2
Restoring the chassis
1.
12.6
Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedures for restoring the system after replacement,
addition, and removal of internal disks. The restoration procedure differs depending
on the maintenance type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
12.6.1
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance
The procedure may vary depending on the configuration of the hard disk drive.
When the system is configured with a hardware RAID
The operation varies depending on the hardware RAID configuration (RAID 0, RAID
1, or RAID 1E). For details, see "14.2.9 Checking for a failed disk drive" in the
Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and Administration Guide.
234
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
When the system is configured with a software RAID
See your software manual.
When the system is configured without either a hardware RAID or software
RAID
To replace or remove an internal disk, perform the procedure from step 2.
1. Return to the operation of the cfgadm(1M) command of Oracle Solaris
super-user prompt and confirm that the number of internal disks has increased.
If you installed an internal disk, make note of the Ap_ID of the added disk. The
Ap_ID refers to a string such as "c4::dsk/c4t5000039428298FFEd0".
If you replaced or reduced an internal disk, you do not have to perform this step.
# cfgadm -a
2.
Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to incorporate the internal disk requiring
maintenance into Oracle Solaris.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
# cfgadm -c configure Ap_ID
3.
Execute the cfgadm(1M) command to confirm that the internal disk requiring
maintenance has been incorporated.
The incorporated internal disk is displayed as "configured."
# cfgadm -a
4.
12.6.2
Close the rack door.
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
235
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the internal disk requiring
maintenance is normally recognized.
When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
XSCF> testsb -y -p 00-0
During the diagnosis processing, the probe-scsi-all command of the OpenBoot
PROM is executed, and the result is displayed.
12.6.3
4.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the internal disk requiring maintenance is
mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
5.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Hot maintenance
For a single-chassis configuration
1.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
2.
Close the rack door.
For a building-block configuration
12.6.4
1.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
2.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
236
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "6.5.1
Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the internal disk requiring
maintenance is normally recognized.
When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
XSCF> testsb -y -p 00-0
During the diagnosis processing, the probe-scsi-all command of the OpenBoot
PROM is executed, and the result is displayed.
12.6.5
4.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
5.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis.
Proceed to step 3.
3.
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the internal disk requiring
maintenance is normally recognized.
When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
Chapter 12
Maintaining the Internal Disks
237
XSCF> testsb -y -p 00-0
During the diagnosis processing, the probe-scsi-all command of the OpenBoot
PROM is executed, and the result is displayed.
238
4.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
5.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining a PCI Express (PCIe) card
mounted in a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. A PCIe card can be replaced, expanded, and
reduced.
■
Configuration of the PCI Express Cards
13.1
■
Before Maintaining a PCI Express Card
■
Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used
■
Enabling the Removal of a PCI Express Card
■
Removing a PCI Express Card
■
Installing a PCI Express Card
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the PCI Express
Cards
This section describes the configuration and locations of the PCIe cards.
Up to eight PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4S with a crossbar unit. Up
to 11 PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4 without a crossbar unit.
239
Figure 13-1
Location of the PCIe card
(1) (2)
(3)(4)
(5)
(6) (7)
(8)
Location
number
Component
1
PCIe card (PCI#0)
2
PCIe card (PCI#1)
3
PCIe card (PCI#2)
4
PCIe card (PCI#3)
5
PCIe card (PCI#4)
6
PCIe card (PCI#5)
7
PCIe card (PCI#6)
8
PCIe card (PCI#7)
9
PCIe card (PCI#8) (*)
10
PCIe card (PCI#9) (*)
11
PCIe card (PCI#10) (*)
(9)
(10)
(11)
*: Can be mounted only on a SPARC M10-4.
240
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
13.2
Before Maintaining a PCI Express
Card
This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the PCIe cards, as
well as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
13.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 13-1 lists the types of maintenance for the PCIe cards. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
The PCIe cards can be removed/installed while the input power to the chassis is on
(power cord is connected).
This section explains how to perform all types of maintenance work while the power
cord of the chassis remains connected.
Table 13-1
Types of maintenance for PCIe cards
Configuration
Active/hot
(with PHP)
Active/hot
(with DR)
Inactive/hot
System stopped
Single-chassis
configuration
Supported (*1)
Unsupported
Unsupported (*3)
Supported
Building block
configuration
Supported (*1)
Supported (*2)
Supported
Supported
*1:
*2:
*3:
Perform maintenance work using PCI hot plug (PHP). See "13.3 Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used" to check whether
PHP can be used.
If SE0X7SA2F (an SAS card) is used, PCIe card release using PHP may fail. If the release fails, perform inactive replacement.
It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) for the physical partition to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the
physical partition.
For a single-chassis configuration, system-stopped maintenance should be performed.
13.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 13-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for PCIe cards. The
procedure for expanding a PCIe card is the same as that for installing a PCIe card.
The procedure for reducing a PCIe card is the same as that for removing a PCIe card.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
241
Table 13-2
13.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
Expansion
Reduction
1
Pre-check
13.3
13.3
13.3
2
Preparation
13.4
13.4
13.4
3
Removing a PCIe card or the filler for a
PCIe card
13.5
13.5
13.5
4
Installing a PCIe card or the filler for a
PCIe card
13.6
13.6
13.6
5
Restoring the system
13.7
13.7
13.7
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when replacing PCIe cards.
For active maintenance by PHP, a multipath setting is necessary depending on the
use of the PCIe cards.
■
13.2.4
Precautions for installation
Note the following points when performing PCIe card expansion.
Set a multipath depending on the use of the PCIe card when performing active/hot
maintenance or active/cold maintenance with PHP.
■
■
■
13.2.5
If you are performing PCIe card expansion, remove the filler for the PCIe card
from the PCIe card cassette.
Keep the removed filler because it will be needed if PCIe card reduction is
subsequently done.
Precautions for removal
Note the following points when removing PCIe cards.
Set a multipath depending on the use of the PCIe card when performing active/hot
maintenance or active/cold maintenance with PHP.
■
■
242
If you are removing a PCIe card, attach the filler for the PCIe card after removing
the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
13.3
Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can
Be Used
PHP enables you to perform maintenance for the PCIe cards while Oracle Solaris is
operating. This section checks whether the PCIe card requiring maintenance can use
PHP.
1. Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the PCIe card requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
3.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
4.
Check whether the PCIe card requiring maintenance supports PHP.
The following PCIe cards do not support PHP:
[FCoE] SP1X7FAR2F, SP1X7FAS2F, SP1X7FBR2F, and SP1X7FBS2F
[IB] SE1X7BA12F and 7104073 (7104074)
If the PCIe card requiring maintenance does not support PHP or if you do not
use PHP, you do not have to perform step 5 and the subsequent step.
5.
# ldm list-io -l
NAME
---PCIE0
[pci@8000]
PCIE1
[pci@8100]
PCIE2
[pci@8200]
PCIE3
[pci@8300]
PCIE4
[pci@8400]
PCIE5
[pci@8500]
PCIE6
[pci@8600]
PCIE7
If the PCIe card requiring maintenance supports PHP, execute the ldm list-io -l
command to confirm the logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned
and the logical domain to which the PCIe root complex the PCIe card belongs
to is assigned.
TYPE
---BUS
BUS
--PCIE0
DOMAIN
-----primary
BUS
PCIE1
primary
BUS
PCIE2
primary
BUS
PCIE3
rootdom
BUS
PCIE4
primary
BUS
PCIE5
primary
BUS
PCIE6
rootdom
BUS
PCIE7
primary
Chapter 13
STATUS
------
<--(*1)
IOV
<--(*2)
<--(*3)
IOV
IOV
<--(*4)
IOV
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
243
[pci@8700]
/BB0/CMUL/NET0
PCIE
[pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9]
network@0
network@0,1
/BB0/CMUL/SASHBA
PCIE
[pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0]
scsi@0/iport@f/disk@w50000393a82368b2,0
scsi@0/iport@f/smp@w500000e0e06d03bf
scsi@0/iport@f/enclosure@w500000e0e06d03bd,0
scsi@0/iport@v0
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE
[pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0]
/BB0/PCI3
PCIE
[pci@8200/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0]
/BB0/PCI4
PCIE
[pci@8200/pci@4/pci@0/pci@8]
/BB0/PCI7
PCIE
[pci@8300/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0]
/BB0/PCI8
PCIE
[pci@8300/pci@4/pci@0/pci@8]
/BB0/CMUL/NET2
PCIE
[pci@8400/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a]
network@0
network@0,1
/BB0/PCI1
PCIE
[pci@8500/pci@4/pci@0/pci@8]
/BB0/PCI2
PCIE
[pci@8500/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9]
/BB0/PCI5
PCIE
[pci@8600/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9]
/BB0/PCI6
PCIE
[pci@8600/pci@4/pci@0/pci@11]
/BB0/PCI9
PCIE
[pci@8700/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9]
/BB0/PCI10
PCIE
[pci@8700/pci@4/pci@0/pci@11]
PCIE0
primary
OCC
PCIE0
primary
OCC
PCIE1
primary
PCIE2
primary
PCIE2
iodom1
PCIE3
rootdom
PCIE3
rootdom
PCIE4
primary
OCC
PCIE5
rootdom
EMP
PCIE5
rootdom
OCC
PCIE6
iodom2
PCIE6
rootdom
OCC
PCIE7
primary
OCC
PCIE7
primary
OCC
OCC
<--(*5)
EMP
OCC
<--(*6)
EMP
EMP
OCC
<--(*7)
<--(*8)
- Logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned
The name shown under [DOMAIN] (of the row containing "/BBx/PCIx" under
[NAME]) for the slot of the PCIe card requiring maintenance represents the
logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned. (*5 to *8 in the execution
example)
*5: /BB0/PCI0 is assigned to primary, and PCIE1 is also assigned to primary.
*6: /BB0/PCI4 is assigned to iodom1, and PCIE2 is assigned to primary.
*7: /BB0/PCI8 is assigned to rootdom, and PCIE3 is also assigned to rootdom.
*8: /BB0/PCI5 is assigned to iodom2, and PCIE6 is assigned to rootdom.
- Logical domain to which the PCIe root complex the PCIe card belongs to is
assigned
The name "PCIEx" shown under [BUS] of the row described above is the name
of the PCIe root complex the PCIe card belongs to. The name shown under
[DOMAIN] (of the row containing "PCIEx" under [NAME]) for the same PCIe
root complex represents the logical domain to which the PCIe root complex the
244
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
PCIe card belongs to is assigned. (*1 to *4 in the execution example)
*1: PCIE1 is assigned to primary.
*2: PCIE2 is assigned to primary.
*3: PCIE3 is assigned to rootdom.
*4: PCIE6 is assigned to rootdom.
6.
Determine whether PHP can be used, combining the two pieces of information
described above based on the confirmation results obtained in step 5.
- Suppose that both of the logical domains to which the PCIe slot and the PCIe
root complex are assigned are found to be a control domain (primary). In this
case, active/hot maintenance can be performed using PHP from the control
domain. (*5 in Figure 13-2)
- Suppose that both of the logical domains to which the PCIe slot and the PCIe
root complex are assigned are found not to be a control domain but the same
logical domain (root domain). In this case, active/hot maintenance can be
performed using PHP from the root domain. (*7 in Figure 13-2)
- In cases other than the above (those where the domains are found to be I/O
domains), PHP cannot be used. Thus, see Table 13-4 for an appropriate
maintenance procedure. (*6 and *8 in Figure 13-2)
Figure 13-2
*6
Confirming assignment to logical domains
*8
*7
*5
Assign a PCIe endpoint device to I/O domain
*5 to *8 in the figure correspond to the above ldm list-io -l command execution example.
Table 13-3
Whether PHP can be used
Root Complex
PCIe slot
Can PHP be
used?
Remarks
Reference
Control domain
Control domain
Yes
See *5 in the example of
executing the ldm list-io -l
command and *5 in Figure
13-2.
"13.4.1 Active/Hot
maintenance (with PHP)"
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
245
Table 13-3
Whether PHP can be used (continue d)
Root Complex
PCIe slot
Can PHP be
used?
Remarks
Reference
Control domain
I/O domain
No
See *6 in the example of
executing the ldm list-io -l
command and *6 in Figure
13-2.
"Table 13-4 Operations
when PHP cannot be used
or you do not use PHP"
Root domain
Root domain
Yes
See *7 in the example of
executing the ldm list-io -l
command and *7 in Figure
13-2.
"13.4.1 Active/Hot
maintenance (with PHP)"
Root domain
I/O domain
No
See *8 in the example of
executing the ldm list-io -l
command and *8 in Figure
13-2.
"Table 13-4 Operations
when PHP cannot be used
or you do not use PHP"
Table 13-4
Operations when PHP cannot be used or you do not use PHP
System configuration
Operation
Reference
Building block
Use building block configuration DR to
release the target chassis from the physical
partition (*1).
"13.4.2 Active/Hot maintenance
(with DR)"
Single-chassis configuration
Stop the system, and then perform
maintenance.
"13.4.4 System-stopped maintenance"
*1:
If you do not use DR, the same procedure as for a single-chassis configuration should be performed.
13.4
Enabling the Removal of a PCI
Express Card
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal
of a PCIe card. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance
type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)
13.4.1
■
Active/Hot maintenance (with DR)
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)
1.
246
Open the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
2.
Connect to the control domain console of the physical partition.
3.
Check whether there is any guest domain that is virtually using the PCIe card
requiring maintenance.
- For Ethernet card
a. Execute the ldm list-bindings command from the control
domain to check virtual network switch [VSW] information for the physical
network interface name ([NET-DEV] value) that is assigned to a virtual
network switch.
In the following example, "rootdom", the logical domain name to which the
PCIe card is assigned, is specified.
# ldm list-bindings rootdom
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VSW
NAME
MAC
NET-DEV
ID
DEVICE
LINKPROP
DEFAULT-VLAN-ID PVID ......
vsw0
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx net4(*1)
0
switch@0
1
PEER
MAC
PVID VID
MTU
MAXBW .....
vnet0@guest1(*2)
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx 1
1500
1
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
*1: Physical network interface
*2: Virtual network device and guest domain serviced by vsw0
b. Log in to the logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned. Then,
determine the physical location of the physical network interface above,
and check whether it corresponds to the PCIe card requiring maintenance.
- For Oracle Solaris 11, execute the dladm show-phys -L command to determine
[LOC] (physical location) of the physical network interface corresponding to
[NET-DEV] in step a.
# dladm show-phys -L
LINK
DEVICE
net0
igb0
net1
igb1
net2
igb2
net3
igb3
net4
ixgbe0
net5
ixgbe1
LOC
/BB0/CMUL
/BB0/CMUL
/BB0/CMUU
/BB0/CMUU
BB#0-PCI#0
BB#0-PCI#0
<--*
- For Oracle Solaris 10, execute the /etc/path_to_inst command to confirm the
physical device path, and compare it with the physical device path displayed
by the ldm list-io -l command to determine the physical location.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
247
# grep " 0 \"ixgbe"\" /etc/path_to_inst
"/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/network@0" 0 "ixgbe"
c. If the virtual network switch to which the PCIe card requiring maintenance
is assigned is found in steps a and b, see the [PEER] part of the virtual
network switch displayed in step a. Confirm the part for the virtual network
device and guest domain that use the services of the virtual network
switch.
The display format is "@."
- For SAS card or FibreChannel card
a. Execute the ldm list-bindings command from the control domain to check
virtual disk service [VDS] information for the virtual disk backend
([DEVICE] value) that is assigned to the virtual disk service.
For information on the types that can be assigned to a virtual disk backend,
see "Virtual Disk Backend" in the Oracle VM Server for SPARC Administration
Guide.
In the following example, "rootdom", the logical domain name to which the
PCIe card is assigned, is specified.
# ldm list-bindings rootdom
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VDS
NAME
VOLUME
OPTIONS
MPGROUP
vds0
vol0
vdisks/vdisk.img (*1)
vol1
dsk/rpool/zvdisk1
vol2
cxtxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxdxsx
CLIENT
VOLUME
vdisk1@guest1
vol0 (*2)
vdisk2@guest2
vol1
vdisk3@guest3
vol2
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
DEVICE
/export/
/dev/zvol/
/dev/dsk/
*1: Virtual disk backend
*2: Virtual disk name and guest domain name to which the backend of vol0 is
assigned
b. Log in to the logical domain to which the PCIe card is assigned to identify
the physical disk from the backend. Then, identify the PCIe card in use
from the physical disk.
For details of the procedure, see documents for the software that manages
respective file system and volume.
For example, suppose that the backend is a file on the ZFS file system. In this
case, execute the zfs list command to confirm the ZFS storage pool corresponding
to the mount point of the directory in which the file is located. Then, execute
zpool status to confirm the physical device path of the PCIe card
to which a LU or hard disk is connected.
248
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
If MPxIO performs management, use the mpathadm command to display the
device path of the physical hard disk corresponding to a LU. Then, confirm
the physical device path of the PCIe card that is connected to the physical
hard disk.
c. If the virtual disk service to which the PCIe card requiring maintenance is
assigned is found in steps a and b, see the [CLIENT] part for the virtual disk
service displayed in step a. Confirm the virtual disk and guest domain to
which the backend of the virtual disk service is assigned.
The display format is "@."
4.
If there is any guest domain that is virtually using the PCIe card requiring
maintenance, delete the virtual device (vnet, vdisk) and the virtual service
(vsw, vds).
a. Log in to the guest domain to stop the use of the virtual device.
If the virtual device is used by the duplication function, release it using the
duplication function so as not to use the target virtual device.
b. Delete the virtual device and the virtual service using the ldm command
from the control domain.
If you need to restore the original configuration after performing maintenance
on the PCIe card, make a note of the setting information in advance.
- For virtual network
# ldm remove-vnet
# ldm remove-vswitch
- For virtual disk
# ldm remove-vdisk
# ldm remove-vdiskserver
5.
If the PCIe card requiring maintenance belongs to the root domain, connect to
the console of the root domain.
If it belongs to the control domain, operations are performed from the control
domain console. Thus, you do not have to perform this step.
6.
Execute the svcadm enable command to activate the hotplug service.
# svcadm enable hotplug
7.
Execute the cfgadm -a command to confirm the Ap_ID of the PCIe card
requiring maintenance and its status.
Confirm the Ap_ID and make a note of it.
In the following example, [Receptacle] and [Occupant] contain "connected" and
"configured", respectively, which indicates that the PCIe card requiring
maintenance is incorporated into the logical domain.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
249
# cfgadm -a
Ap_Id
BB#0-PCI#0
Type
pci-pci/hp
8.
Receptacle
connected
Occupant
configured
Condition
ok
Execute the cfgadm -c command to release the PCIe card requiring
maintenance from the logical domain.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
# cfgadm -c unconfigure Ap_Id
9.
Execute the cfgadm -c command to stop the power supply to the PCIe card
requiring maintenance.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
# cfgadm -c disconnect Ap_Id
10. Execute the cfgadm -a command to confirm the status of the PCIe card again.
In the following example, [Receptacle] and [Occupant] contain "disconnected"
and "unconfigured", respectively, which indicates that the PCIe card requiring
maintenance is released from the logical domain.
# cfgadm -a
Ap_Id
BB#0-PCI#0
Type
pci-pci/hp
Receptacle
Occupant
Condition
disconnected unconfigured ok
11. Execute the cfgadm -x command to cause the ATTENTION LED on the PCIe
card cassette requiring maintenance to blink.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
# cfgadm -x led=attn,mode=blink Ap_Id
13.4.2
Active/Hot maintenance (with DR)
Note - To perform active/hot maintenance without using PHP, use DR of the system board
on the physical partition. For information on the versions of XCP and Oracle VM Server for
SPARC/SRU that support DR, see the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/hot maintenance without using PHP can be performed only for a building
block configuration.
250
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
3.
Release from the physical partition the chassis in which the PCIe card
requiring maintenance is mounted.
a. Referencing step 5 in "13.3 Checking If PCI Hot Plug (PHP) Can Be Used,"
confirm the logical domains to which the PCIe root complex and PCIe slot
of the chassis with the maintenance target mounted are assigned.
b. Execute the ldm list-bindings command for these logical
domains to confirm the name of the guest domain to which the virtual
service (vsw, vds) is provided.
In the following example, "rootdom", the logical domain name to which the
PCIe card is assigned, is specified.
# ldm list-bindings rootdom
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VSW
NAME
MAC
NET-DEV
ID
DEVICE
LINKPROP
DEFAULT-VLAN-ID PVID ......
vsw0
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx net4
0
switch@0
1
PEER
MAC
PVID VID
MTU
MAXBW .....
vnet0@guest1(*1)
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx 1
1500
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------VDS
NAME
VOLUME
OPTIONS
MPGROUP
vds0
vol0
vdisks/vdisk.img (*2)
vol1
dsk/rpool/zvdisk1
vol2
cxtxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxdxsx
CLIENT
VOLUME
vdisk1@guest1
vol0 (*1)
vdisk2@guest2
vol1 (*1)
vdisk3@guest3
vol2 (*1)
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------
1
DEVICE
/export/
/dev/zvol/
/dev/dsk/
*1: Guest domain that uses the virtual device
*2: Virtual disk backend
c. If the guest domain that uses the virtual device is found in step b, log in to
the guest domain to stop the use of the virtual device.
If the virtual device is used by the duplication function, release it using the
duplication function so as not to use the target virtual device.
d. If the logical domains confirmed in step a are I/O domains, stop the I/O
domains and delete the assigned PCIe slot.
If you need to restore the original configuration after performing maintenance
on the PCIe card, make a note of the deleted PCIe slot and the domain name
in advance.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
251
# ldm stop iodomain
# ldm remove-io /BB1/PCI0 iodomain
e. Release from the physical partition the chassis in which the PCIe card
requiring maintenance is mounted.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
4.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
13.4.3
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Inactive/Hot maintenance
Note - Inactive/hot maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
For a single-chassis configuration, system-stopped maintenance should be performed.
13.4.4
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
3.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
System-stopped maintenance
The PCIe cards can be removed/installed while the input power to the chassis is on
(power cord is connected). System-stopped maintenance is also described as
maintenance performed while the power cord remains connected.
1. Open the rack door.
252
2.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
3.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
13.5
Removing a PCI Express Card
This section describes the procedure for removing a PCIe card. Perform reduction
using the same procedure.
For installation, remove the filler for a PCIe card instead of removing a PCIe card.
Enable the removal of the PCIe card before attempting to remove it. For details, see
"13.4 Enabling the Removal of a PCI Express Card."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
13.5.1
Accessing a PCI Express card cassette
1.
Lower the cable support.
For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support."
Note - If the crossbar cables are fixed to the cable support with the hook-and-loop fastener,
remove the hook-and-loop fastener.
2.
Remove the cables connected to the PCIe card cassette requiring maintenance.
Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.
13.5.2
Removing a PCI Express card cassette
There are two types of PCIe card cassettes. The shapes of the latch (A in the figure)
and lever (B in the figure) vary depending on the type of the PCIe card cassette, but
the same removal procedure applies. For the types of PCIe card cassettes, see "Figure
13-3."
Unless otherwise specified, the figures explained in this section use Type-1.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
253
Figure 13-3
Types of PCIe card cassettes
Type-1
Type-2
A
A
B
B
1.
Lower the lever (B in the figure) of the PCIe card cassette while pushing the
latch (A in the figure).
Figure 13-4
Lever of PCIe card cassette
A
2.
254
B
Hold the lever and carefully pull the PCIe card cassette out of the PCI slot to
remove it.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - Place the removed PCIe card cassette on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Figure 13-5
13.5.3
Removing the PCIe card cassette
Removing a PCI Express card
1.
Remove the cover while pushing the clip (A in the figure) at the rear of the
cover.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
255
Figure 13-6
Clip at rear of cover
A
2.
Remove the screw securing the PCIe card cassette.
Figure 13-7
256
Removing the screw
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
3.
Remove the bracket (A in the figure) from the PCIe card.
Figure 13-8
Removing the bracket
A
4.
Remove the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette.
For installation, you do not have to perform this step. Remove the filler for the
PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette.
Note - Do not forcibly remove the PCIe card from the PCIe card cassette. If excessive force is
used to remove the PCIe card, it may be damaged.
Note - Place the removed PCIe card on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
257
Figure 13-9
13.6
Removing the PCIe card
Installing a PCI Express Card
This section describes the procedure for installing a PCIe card. Perform expansion
using the same procedure. When removing a PCIe card, install the filler unit instead
of another PCIe card after removing the PCIe card.
13.6.1
Installing a PCI Express card
1.
Install the PCIe card by inserting it into the connector of the PCIe card cassette.
For removal of a PCIe card, you do not have to perform this step. Attach the
filler for the PCIe card to the PCIe card cassette.
Note - Confirm that the tab of the PCIe card or the tab of the filler for the PCIe card is
inserted in the notch of the PCIe card cassette.
258
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 13-10
2.
Installing a PCIe card
Install the bracket for the PCIe card, and secure it with the screw.
Figure 13-11
Installing the bracket
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
259
3.
13.6.2
Mount the cover on the PCIe card cassette.
Installing a PCI Express card cassette
Note - When mounting a PCIe card cassette, check the connectors on both of the
chassis and PCIe card cassette beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the
pins are neatly arranged in lines. If a PCIe card cassette is mounted with a bent pin in
a connector, the chassis or PCIe card cassette may be damaged. Also, carefully
proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent.
1.
Hold the lever of the PCIe card cassette, and carefully insert it into the PCIe
slot.
Note - Slide the PCIe card cassette along the rail at the bottom of the PCIe slot.
Note - Do not forcibly push the PCIe card cassette into the PCIe slot. Using excessive force
may damage the component or the chassis.
2.
Raise the lever of the PCIe card cassette while pushing the latch and secure
it.
Note - Ensure that the PCIe card cassette is firmly inserted and secured.
13.6.3
Restoring the chassis
1.
Connect the cables to the PCIe card cassette.
Note - Reinstall the cables of the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to
notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance.
2.
13.7
Lift the cable support to fix it.
For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedures for restoring the system after replacement,
addition, and removal of PCIe cards. The restoration procedure differs depending on
the maintenance type as follows:
260
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
13.7.1
■
Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)
■
Active/Hot maintenance (with DR)
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance (with PHP)
1.
Display the Oracle Solaris super-user prompt.
2.
Execute the cfgadm -c command to start the power supply to the PCIe card
requiring maintenance.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
# cfgadm -c connect Ap_Id
3.
Execute the cfgadm -c command to incorporate the PCIe card requiring
maintenance into the logical domain.
Enter the Ap_ID you noted in advance.
# cfgadm -c configure Ap_Id
4.
Execute the cfgadm -a command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring
maintenance has been incorporated into the logical domain.
In the following example, [Receptacle], [Occupant], and [Condition] contain
"connected", "configured", and "ok", respectively, which indicates that the PCIe
card requiring maintenance is incorporated into the logical domain.
# cfgadm -a
Ap_Id
Condition
BB#0-PCI#0
5.
Type
Receptacle
Occupant
pci-pci/hp
connected
configured
ok
Execute the svcadm disable command to disable the hotplug service.
# svcadm disable hotplug
6.
If you deleted the virtual device and the virtual service in "13.4.1 Active/Hot
maintenance (with PHP)," add them based on the information you made a
note of and reassign them to the guest domain.
For details on how to add a virtual device and a virtual service, see the Oracle
VM Server for SPARC Administration Guide.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
261
7.
13.7.2
Close the rack door.
Active/Hot maintenance (with DR)
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring
maintenance is recognized.
When you enter the "-y" option for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0
During the diagnosis processing, the show-devs command of OpenBoot PROM
is executed, and the result is displayed.
13.7.3
3.
Incorporate into the physical partition the chassis in which the PCIe card
requiring maintenance is mounted.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
4.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring
maintenance is recognized.
When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0
262
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
13.7.4
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
2.
Execute the testsb command to confirm that the PCIe card requiring
maintenance is recognized.
When you input optional "-y" for the testsb command, the system automatically
answers "y" (yes) in response to an inquiry.
The following example shows the diagnosis of system board 00-0.
XSCF> testsb -v -y -s 00-0
During the diagnosis processing, the show-devs command of OpenBoot PROM
is executed, and the result is displayed.
3.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
4.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 13
Maintaining the PCI Express Cards
263
264
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the PSU backplane unit
mounted in a SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
■
Location of the PSU Backplane Unit
14.1
■
Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of the PSU Backplane Unit
■
Removing the PSU Backplane Unit
■
Installing the PSU Backplane Unit
■
Restoring the System
Location of the PSU Backplane Unit
This section describes the location of the PSU backplane unit.
The PSU backplane unit has connectors for connecting multiple power supply units.
Caution - Do not replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory
unit. If you replace a PSU backplane unit at the same time as a CPU memory unit, the
system may fail to operate normally. Replace a PSU backplane unit or CPU memory
unit, and confirm that the newly installed part is normal by using the showhardconf
or showstatus command. Then, replace the other Field Replaceable Unit (FRU).
265
Figure 14-1
Location of PSU backplane unit
(1)
14.2
Location
number
Component
1
PSU backplane unit (PSUBP)
Before Maintaining the PSU Backplane
Unit
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the PSU backplane
unit.
266
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
14.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 14-1 lists the types of maintenance for the PSU backplane unit. For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 14-1
Types of maintenance for PSU backplane unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Single-chassis configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Supported (*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
*1:
*2:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
14.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 14-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the PSU backplane
unit.
Table 14-2
14.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
14.3
2
Removing the PSU backplane unit
14.4
3
Installing the PSU backplane unit
14.5
4
Restoring the system
14.6
Enabling the Removal of the PSU
Backplane Unit
This section describes the preparation that must be completed prior to removing the
PSU backplane unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance
type as follows:
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
267
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
14.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the building block, in which the PSU backplane unit requiring
maintenance is mounted, from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
268
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
14.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
14.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
The procedure in the case of system-stopped maintenance is same for the building
block configuration and single-chassis configuration.
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
269
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis.
Proceed to step 7.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
14.4
Removing the PSU Backplane Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing the PSU backplane unit from the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S. Enable the removal of the PSU backplane unit before
attempting to remove it. For details, see "14.3 Enabling the Removal of the PSU
Backplane Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
270
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
14.4.1
Accessing the PSU backplane unit
1.
Lower the cable support.
For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support."
2.
Remove all the cables connected to the external interface.
The cables to be removed are as follows.
■
Interface cable connected to the PCI Express (PCIe) card
■
Crossbar cable
■
XSCF BB control cable
■
XSCF DUAL control cable
■
LAN cable
Note - Make a note of the positions of the cables connected to the external interface before
disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
3.
Remove all PCIe card cassettes.
For details, see "13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette."
Note - Make a note of the positions of the PCIe card cassettes before removing them to ensure
that they are reinstalled correctly.
4.
Remove all the crossbar units.
For details, see "9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit."
Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 6.
5.
Loosen the three screws securing the mounting frame of the crossbar unit
and then remove the frame.
Figure 14-2
Screws securing the mounting frame
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
271
6.
Loosen the screw securing the CPU memory unit and then lower the right and
left levers to the horizontal position.
Figure 14-3
Screw securing the CPU memory unit
7.
Pull the CPU memory unit out by about 10 cm (3.9 in.)
8.
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
9.
Remove all the power supply units.
For details, see "10.4 Removing a Power Supply Unit."
Note - Make a note of the positions of the power supply units before removing them to
ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
10. Remove all the fan units.
For details, see "11.4 Removing a Fan Unit."
Note - Make a note of the locations of the fan units before removing them to ensure that they
are reinstalled correctly.
11. Remove all the internal disks or the HDD filler units.
For details, see "12.4 Removing an Internal Disk."
Note - Make a note of the positions of the internal disks before removing them to ensure that
they are reinstalled correctly.
12. Loosen the two screws in the fan slot and then remove the fan shelf.
272
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 14-4
14.4.2
Screws in the fan slot
Removing the PSU backplane unit
1.
Loosen the two screws securing the PSU backplane unit and then partially
pull out the PSU backplane unit.
Figure 14-5
2.
Screws securing the PSU backplane unit
Pull the PSU backplane unit out a little more. Then, remove the unit by holding
its handle.
Note - Place the removed PSU backplane unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
273
Figure 14-6
3.
14.5
Handle of PSU backplane unit
Remove the operation panel.
For details, see step 2 and later in "15.4.2 Removing the operation panel."
Installing the PSU Backplane Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing the PSU backplane unit.
14.5.1
274
Installing the PSU backplane unit
1.
Install the operation panel on the PSU backplane unit.
For details, see "15.5.1 Installing the operation panel."
2.
Insert the PSU backplane unit into the chassis by holding the handle.
3.
Tighten the two screws securing the PSU backplane unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
14.5.2
Restoring the chassis
1.
Install the fan shelf and then tighten the two screws in the fan slot.
2.
Install all the power supply units.
For details, see "10.5.1 Installing a power supply unit."
Note - Install the power supply units in their original positions by referring to the notes that
you made prior to the start of maintenance.
3.
Install all the fan units.
For details, see "11.5.1 Installing a fan unit."
Note - Reinstall the fan units in their original locations by referring to the notes you made
prior to the start of maintenance.
4.
Install all the internal disks or HDD filler units.
For details, see "12.5 Installing an Internal Disk."
Note - Reinstall the internal disks in their original locations by referring to the notes that you
made prior to the start of maintenance.
5.
Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
6.
Insert the CPU memory unit in the chassis.
7.
Raise the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit and then tighten the
one screw.
8.
Install the mounting frame for the crossbar unit and then tighten the three
screws.
Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 10.
9.
Install all the crossbar units.
For details, see "9.5.1 Installing a crossbar unit."
10. Install all the PCIe card cassettes.
For details, see "13.6.2 Installing a PCI Express card cassette."
Note - Reinstall the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to the notes
that you made prior to the start of maintenance.
11. Connect all the cables to the external interface.
The cables to be connected are as follows.
■
Interface cable connected to the PCIe card
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
275
■
Crossbar cable
■
XSCF BB control cable
■
XSCF DUAL control cable
■
LAN cable
Note - Reconnect the cables of the external interface in their original positions by referring to
the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance.
12. Lift the cable support to fix it.
For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support."
14.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the PSU
backplane unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance
type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
14.6.1
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
276
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "6.1
Command."
3.
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical
partition is powered on.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
14.6.2
Checking log information."
5.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the PSU backplane unit requiring
maintenance is mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
6.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
277
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
14.6.3
Checking log information."
5.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis.
Proceed to step 5.
3.
278
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
5.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
6.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 14
Maintaining the PSU Backplane Unit
279
280
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the operation panel mounted
on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
■
Location of the Operation Panel
15.1
■
Before Maintaining the Operation Panel
■
Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel
■
Removing the Operation Panel
■
Installing the Operation Panel
■
Restoring the System
Location of the Operation Panel
This section describes the location of the operation panel.
281
Figure 15-1
Location of the operation panel
(1)
15.2
Location number
Component
1
Operation panel (OPNL)
Before Maintaining the Operation
Panel
This section describes the types and flow of the maintenance of the operation panel,
as well as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
15.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 15-1 lists the types of maintenance for the operation panel. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
282
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 15-1
Types of maintenance for operation panel
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold (*1)
System stopped
Single-chassis configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Supported (*2)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
*1:
*2:
For a single-chassis configuration, the inactive/cold maintenance procedure is the same as that for stopping the system, therefore see
the procedure for system-stopped maintenance.
It is necessary to use dynamic reconfiguration (DR) to disconnect a chassis requiring maintenance from the physical partition.
15.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 15-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the operation panel.
Table 15-2
15.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
15.3
2
Removing the operation panel
15.4
3
Installing the operation panel
15.5
4
Restoring the system
15.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following point when replacing the operation panel:
■
If you replace the operation panel, set the BB-ID for the new operation panel to the
same value as that prior to the start of maintenance.
15.3
Enabling the Removal of the Operation
Panel
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal
of the operation panel. The preparation procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
■
Active/Cold maintenance
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
283
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
15.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Release the chassis, in which the operation panel requiring maintenance is
mounted, from the physical partition.
For details, see "5.2 Releasing a Chassis from the Physical Partition."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
284
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
15.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
15.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
The procedure in the case of system-stopped maintenance is same for the building
block configuration and single-chassis configuration.
1. Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
285
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to release the chassis.
Proceed to step 7.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
15.4
Removing the Operation Panel
This section describes the procedure for removing the operation panel.
Enable the removal of the operation panel before attempting to remove it. For details,
see "15.3 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
286
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
15.4.1
Accessing the operation panel
1.
Check the ID switch on the operation panel and record the BB-ID set for the
chassis requiring maintenance.
2.
Lower the cable support.
For details, see "5.5.1 Lowering the cable support."
3.
Remove all the cables connected to the external interface.
The cables to be removed are as follows.
■
Interface cable connected to the PCI Express (PCIe) card
■
Crossbar cable
■
XSCF BB control cable
■
XSCF DUAL control cable
■
LAN cable
Note - Make a note of the positions of the cables connected to the external interface before
disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
4.
Remove all PCIe card cassettes.
For details, see "13.5.2 Removing a PCI Express card cassette."
Note - Make a note of the positions of the PCIe card cassettes before removing them to ensure
that they are reinstalled correctly.
5.
Remove all the crossbar units.
For details, see "9.4.2 Removing a crossbar unit."
Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 7.
6.
Loosen the three screws securing the mounting frame of the crossbar unit
and then remove the frame.
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
287
Figure 15-2
7.
Screws securing the mounting frame
Loosen the screw securing the CPU memory unit and lower the right and left
levers to the horizontal position.
Figure 15-3
Screw securing CPU memory unit
8.
Pull out the CPU memory unit by about 10 cm (3.9 in.)
9.
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
10. Pull out the power supply unit by about 10 cm (3.9 in.)
For details, see "10.4 Removing a Power Supply Unit."
11. Remove all the fan units.
For details, see "11.4 Removing a Fan Unit."
288
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - Make a note of the locations of the fan units before removing them to ensure that they
are reinstalled correctly.
12. Loosen the two screws in the fan slot and then remove the fan shelf.
Figure 15-4
15.4.2
Screws in the fan slot
Removing the operation panel
1.
Loosen the two screws securing the PSU backplane unit and partially pull out
the PSU backplane unit.
Figure 15-5
2.
Screws securing the PSU backplane unit
Remove the cable from the operation panel and loosen one screw (A in the
figure).
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
289
Figure 15-6
Cables and screws of the operation panel
A
3.
Pull the operation panel forward to remove it.
Note - Place the removed operation panel on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
15.5
Installing the Operation Panel
This section describes the procedure for installing the operation panel.
15.5.1
290
Installing the operation panel
1.
Set the BB-ID of the operation panel to the value prior to the start of
maintenance.
2.
Place the operation panel in the mounting position and then tighten one
screw.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
15.5.2
Restoring the chassis
1.
Connect the cables to the operation panel.
2.
Reinstall the PSU backplane unit in its original position and then tighten the
two screws.
3.
Reinstall the fan shelf and then tighten the two screws in the fan slot.
4.
Reinstall the power supply unit in its original position.
For details, see "10.5.1 Installing a power supply unit."
5.
Install all the fan units.
For details, see "11.5.1 Installing a fan unit."
Note - Reinstall the fan units in their original positions by referring to the notes you made
prior to the start of maintenance.
6.
Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
Note - Check that the front cover is firmly attached and secured.
7.
Insert the CPU memory unit into the chassis.
8.
Raise the right and left levers of the CPU memory unit and then tighten the
one screw.
9.
Install the mounting frame for the crossbar unit and then tighten the three
screws.
Note - If no crossbar unit is mounted, proceed to step 11.
10. Install all the crossbar units.
For details, see "9.5.1 Installing a crossbar unit."
11. Install all the PCIe card cassettes.
For details, see "13.6.2 Installing a PCI Express card cassette."
Note - Reinstall the PCIe card cassettes in their original positions by referring to the notes
that you made prior to the start of maintenance.
12. Connect all the cables to the external interface.
The cables to be connected are as follows.
■
Interface cable connected to the PCIe card
■
Crossbar cable
■
XSCF BB control cable
■
XSCF DUAL control cable
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
291
■
LAN cable
Note - Reconnect the cables of the external interface in their original positions by referring to
the notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance.
13. Lift the cable support to fix it.
For details, see "6.5.2 Fixing the cable support."
15.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the
operation panel. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance
type as follows:
Note - See the procedure for system-stopped maintenance for inactive/cold maintenance in a
single-chassis configuration.
15.6.1
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Use the DR of the system board on a physical partition for active/cold maintenance.
For the XCP and Oracle VM Server for SPARC/SRU versions that correspond to the DR, see
the latest Product Notes.
Note - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
292
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical
partition is powered on.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
15.6.2
Checking log information."
5.
Incorporate the chassis, in which the operation panel requiring maintenance
is mounted, into the physical partition.
For details, see "6.2 Incorporating a Chassis into a Physical Partition."
6.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
Note - Inactive/cold maintenance can be performed only for a building block configuration.
The inactive/cold maintenance procedure for a single-chassis configuration is the same as
that for stopping the system.
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
293
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
15.6.3
Checking log information."
5.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
For a single-chassis configuration, you do not have to incorporate the chassis.
Proceed to step 5.
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
294
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
5.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
6.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 15
Maintaining the Operation Panel
295
296
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 16
Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the
Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar units mounted on
the crossbar box.
■
Configuration of the Crossbar Units
16.1
■
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit
■
Removing a Crossbar Unit
■
Installing a Crossbar Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Crossbar Units
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the crossbar units.
297
Figure 16-1
Location of crossbar units
(3)
(2)
(1)
16.2
Location
number
Component
1
Crossbar unit (XBUX#0)
2
Crossbar unit (XBUX#1)
3
Crossbar unit (XBUX#2)
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Unit
This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the crossbar units.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
16.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 16-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar units. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
298
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 16-1
Types of maintenance for the crossbar unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Supported (*1)
Unsupported
Supported
Supported (*2)
*1:
*2:
If any physical partition mounted on two or more chassis is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
16.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 16-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar units.
Table 16-2
16.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
16.3
2
Removing the crossbar units
16.4
3
Installing the crossbar unit
16.5
4
Restoring the system
16.6
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar
Unit
This section describes preparation that must be completed prior to removing a
crossbar unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type
as follows:
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
16.3.1
Active/Cold maintenance
Note - Confirm that the POWER LED on the crossbar box is off.
Chapter 16
Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box
299
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
16.3.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
300
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
16.3.3
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the crossbar unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
16.4
Removing a Crossbar Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing a crossbar unit.
Enable the removal of the crossbar box before attempting to remove it. For details,
see "16.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Unit."
Chapter 16
Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box
301
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
Remove all crossbar cables (optical) connected to the crossbar unit requiring
maintenance.
For details, see "25.4 Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)."
Note - Make a note of the positions of the crossbar cables (optical) before disconnecting them
to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
2.
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) on the right and left sides and lower
the levers to release the crossbar unit.
Figure 16-2
Positions of screws and levers
A
A
3.
302
Hold the levers and partially pull out the crossbar unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 16-3
4.
Pulling out crossbar unit
Support the crossbar unit from below with one hand and remove it carefully.
Note - Place the removed crossbar unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
16.5
Installing a Crossbar Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a crossbar unit.
Note - When mounting a crossbar unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis
and crossbar unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly
arranged in lines. If a crossbar unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the
chassis or crossbar unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to
prevent any pin from being bent.
1.
Carefully insert the crossbar unit into the chassis.
2.
Close the right and left levers of the crossbar unit and tighten two screws.
Chapter 16
Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box
303
3.
Connect all crossbar cables (optical) to the crossbar unit.
For details, see "25.5 Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)."
Note - Reinstall the crossbar cables (optical) in their original positions by referring to the
notes that you made prior to the start of maintenance.
16.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the
crossbar units. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type
as follows:
■
Active/Cold maintenance
16.6.1
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical
partition is powered on.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
304
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
16.6.2
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
16.6.3
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the crossbar unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Chapter 16
Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box
305
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
306
Checking log information."
5.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 17
Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the
Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF unit mounted in the
crossbar box.
■
Location of the XSCF Unit
17.1
■
Before Maintaining the XSCF Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Unit
■
Removing the XSCF Unit
■
Installing the XSCF Unit
■
Restoring the System
Location of the XSCF Unit
This section describes the location of the XSCF unit.
307
Figure 17-1
Location of XSCF unit
(1)
17.2
Location
number
Component
1
XSCF unit (XSCFU)
Before Maintaining the XSCF Unit
This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the XSCF unit.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
17.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 17-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF unit. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
308
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 17-1
Type of maintenance for XSCF unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Supported (*1)
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported (*3)
*1:
*2:
*3:
The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If the XSCF is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a
standby XSCF.
If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
17.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 17-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF unit.
Table 17-2
17.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
17.3
2
Removing an XSCF unit
17.4
3
Installing an XSCF unit
17.5
4
Restoring the system
17.6
Enabling the Removal of the XSCF
Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing an
XSCF unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as
follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
Chapter 17
Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box
309
17.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby
XSCF.
Perform this when the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as a master
chassis.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
17.3.2
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
310
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Stop the physical partition requiring maintenance.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
17.3.3
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
Chapter 17
Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box
311
17.4
Removing the XSCF Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing the XSCF unit.
Enable the removal of the XSCF unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see
"17.3 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
Remove all the cables connected to the maintenance-target XSCF unit.
The cables to be removed are as follows.
■
Serial cable
■
LAN cable
■
USB device
Note - The cables connected to the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened
to the right cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. To remove the cables, first remove
the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support.
Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.
2.
312
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) of the XSCF unit and lower the right
and left levers to release the XSCF unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 17-2
Positions of screws and levers
A
3.
Hold the levers and partially pull out the XSCF unit.
Chapter 17
Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box
313
Figure 17-3
4.
Pulling out the XSCF unit
Support the XSCF unit from below with one hand and then remove it carefully.
Note - Place the removed XSCF unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
17.5
Installing the XSCF Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing the XSCF unit.
Note - When mounting a XSCF unit, check the connectors on both of the chassis and
XSCF unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the pins are neatly
arranged in lines. If an XSCF unit is mounted with a bent pin in a connector, the
chassis or XSCF unit may be damaged. Also, carefully proceed with the work to
prevent any pin from being bent.
314
1.
Carefully insert the XSCF unit into the chassis.
2.
Raise the right and left levers and then tighten the two screws.
3.
Reconnect all the cables to the XSCF unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
The cables to be reconnected are as follows.
■
Serial cable
■
LAN cable
■
USB device
Note - Reinstall the cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made
prior to the start of maintenance.
Note - After connecting the cables, use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle and fix the
cables to the cable support at the rear.
17.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the XSCF
unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
17.6.1
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Check that the XSCF STANDBY LED on the operation panel is on.
For the location of LEDs, see "2.3.3 LEDs on each component."
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the XSCF unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the switchscf command to switch the standby XSCF to the master
XSCF.
Execute the command if the chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to
the standby XSCF.
XSCF> switchscf -t Active
4.
17.6.2
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
Chapter 17
Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the Crossbar Box
315
that the XSCF unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
17.6.3
2.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
3.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
316
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the XSCF unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Start all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 18
Maintaining the Power Supply Units of
the Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the power supply units
mounted in a crossbar box.
■
Configuration of the Power Supply Units
18.1
■
Before Maintaining a Power Supply Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit
■
Removing a Power Supply Unit
■
Installing a Power Supply Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Power Supply
Units
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the power supply units.
The power supply units can have the 1+1 redundant configuration. Active/hot
maintenance can be performed.
317
Figure 18-1
Locations of power supply units
(1)
(2)
18.2
Location
number
Component
1
Power supply unit (PSU#0)
2
Power supply unit (PSU#1)
Before Maintaining a Power Supply
Unit
This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the power supply units,
as well as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
18.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 18-1 lists the types of maintenance for the power supply units. For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
318
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 18-1
Types of maintenance for the power supply unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Supported (*1)
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported
Unsupported
(*2)
Supported (*3)
*1:
*2:
*3:
Active/hot replacement can be performed only with a redundant configuration.
If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
18.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 18-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the power supply
units.
Table 18-2
18.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
18.3
2
Removing a power supply unit
18.4
3
Installing a power supply unit
18.5
4
Restoring the system
18.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when replacing a power supply unit:
■
There are two power supply units. Thus, the system can continue operating even
if one of the units fails. Do not, however, operate the system for an extended
period while one unit has failed.
■
■
18.3
When replacing multiple power supply units, replace one unit at a time. If
redundancy of the power supply unit cannot be assured, then system-stopped
maintenance must be performed.
Do not force push the power supply unit into its slot. If excessive force is applied,
other components or the chassis may be damaged.
Enabling the Removal of a Power
Supply Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to the removal
Chapter 18
Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box
319
of a power supply unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
18.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
Note - Active/hot maintenance is supported only for a redundant configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
6.
18.3.2
320
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove the power cord from the power supply unit requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
18.3.3
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove the power cord from the power supply unit requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the power supply unit requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
Chapter 18
Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box
321
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
18.4
Removing a Power Supply Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing a power supply unit.
Enable the removal of the power supply unit before attempting to remove it. For
details, see "18.3 Enabling the Removal of a Power Supply Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
322
While pushing the lever (A in the figure) of the power supply unit, hold the
handle (B in the figure) and pull out the power supply unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 18-2
B
2.
Removing a power supply unit
A
Support the power supply unit with one hand from below and carefully pull it
out of the slot.
Note - Place the removed power supply unit on the grounded ESD mat to ground any static
electricity.
18.5
Installing a Power Supply Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a power supply unit.
1. Support the power supply unit from below with one hand and insert it
carefully into its slot.
Note - Do not forcibly push the power supply unit into its slot. Using excessive force may
damage the component or the chassis.
2.
Push the power supply unit fully home.
Chapter 18
Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box
323
Note - Check that the power supply unit is fully inserted and that the lever is fixed.
18.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a power
supply unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as
follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
18.6.1
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Connect the power cords to the power supply unit requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
2.
Confirm that the LED (green) of the power supply unit is on.
3.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
4.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the power supply unit is
operating normally after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
5.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
6.
18.6.2
324
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Connect the power cords to the power supply unit requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
2.
Confirm that the LED (green) of the power supply unit is on.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
18.6.3
3.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
4.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
5.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the power supply unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 18
Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box
325
326
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 19
Maintaining the Fan Units of the
Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the fan units mounted in a
crossbar box.
■
Configuration of the Fan Units
19.1
■
Before Maintaining a Fan Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit
■
Removing a Fan Unit
■
Installing a Fan Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Fan Units
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the fan units.
Four fan units are mounted in each chassis.
If one of the cooling fans fails during system operation, the XSCF detects the error.
However, the system can continue operating because the fans have a redundant
configuration.
327
Figure 19-1
Location of fan units
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
19.2
Location
number
Component
1
Fan unit (FANU#0)
2
Fan unit (FANU#1)
3
Fan unit (FANU#2)
4
Fan unit (FANU#3)
Before Maintaining a Fan Unit
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the fan units, as well
as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
328
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
19.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 19-1 lists the types of maintenance for the fan units. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 19-1
Types of maintenance for fan unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Supported
Unsupported
(*1)
Supported
Unsupported
(*1)
Supported (*2)
*1:
*2:
If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
19.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 19-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the fan units.
Table 19-2
19.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
19.3
2
Removing a fan unit
19.4
3
Installing a fan unit
19.5
4
Restoring the system
19.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when replacing a fan unit:
■
When replacing multiple fan units, replace one unit at a time. If a redundant
configuration cannot be assured, perform cold replacement.
■
19.3
The cooling fans have a redundant configuration. Thus, the system can continue
operating even if one of the fans in the fan units experiences a failure. Avoid
operating the system with a faulty fan for an extended period and replace the fan
unit containing the failed fan as soon as possible.
Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a
Chapter 19
Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box
329
fan unit. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as
follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
19.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
19.3.2
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
330
Checking log information."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
19.3.3
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan unit requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
Chapter 19
Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box
331
19.4
Removing a Fan Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing a fan unit.
Enable the removal of the fan unit before attempting to remove it. For details, see
"19.3 Enabling the Removal of a Fan Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
19.4.1
Accessing a fan unit
1.
19.4.2
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
Removing a fan unit
1.
Pull out the fan unit while raising the lever (A in the figure) of the fan unit.
Figure 19-2
Lever of fan unit
A
2.
332
Carefully remove the fan unit from its slot.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Note - Place the removed fan unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
19.5
Installing a Fan Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a fan unit.
19.5.1
Installing a fan unit
1.
Carefully insert the fan unit into its slot.
Note - Do not force the fan unit into the slot. Using excessive force may damage the
component or the chassis.
2.
Push the fan unit fully home.
Note - Check that the fan unit is fully inserted and secured.
19.5.2
Restoring the chassis
1.
19.6
Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a fan
unit. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Chapter 19
Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box
333
19.6.1
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that there is no problem with
the fan unit after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
3.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
4.
19.6.2
19.6.3
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
3.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
334
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the fan unit has been incorporated into the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "6.1
Command."
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
3.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 19
Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box
335
336
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 20
Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of
the Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF interface unit
mounted in a crossbar box.
■
Location of the XSCF Interface Unit
20.1
■
Before Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Interface Unit
■
Removing the XSCF Interface Unit
■
Installing the XSCF Interface Unit
■
Restoring the System
Location of the XSCF Interface Unit
This section describes the location of the XSCF interface unit.
337
Figure 20-1
Location of XSCF interface unit
(1)
20.2
Location
number
Component
1
XSCF interface unit (XSCFIFU)
Before Maintaining the XSCF Interface
Unit
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the XSCF interface
unit.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
20.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 20-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF interface unit. For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
338
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 20-1
Type of maintenance for XSCF interface unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Supported (*2)
*1:
*2:
If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
20.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 20-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF interface
unit.
Table 20-2
20.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
20.3
2
Removing an XSCF interface unit
20.4
3
Installing an XSCF interface unit
20.5
4
Restoring the system
20.6
Enabling the Removal of the XSCF
Interface Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the
XSCF interface unit.
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
Chapter 20
Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of the Crossbar Box
339
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
20.4
Removing the XSCF Interface Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing an XSCF interface unit.
Enable the removal of the XSCF interface unit before attempting to remove it. For
details, see "20.3 Enabling the Removal of the XSCF Interface Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
Remove all the XSCF BB control cables and XSCF DUAL control cables
connected to the XSCF interface unit.
Note - Record the positions of the cables before removing them to ensure that they are
reinstalled correctly.
2.
340
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) of the XSCF interface unit and lower
the right and left levers to release the XSCF interface unit.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 20-2
Positions of screws and levers
A
3.
Hold the levers and partially pull out the XSCF interface unit.
Figure 20-3
4.
Pulling out the XSCF interface unit
Support the XSCF interface unit from below with one hand and then carefully
remove it from the chassis.
Chapter 20
Maintaining the XSCF Interface Unit of the Crossbar Box
341
Note - Place the removed XSCF interface unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
20.5
Installing the XSCF Interface Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing the XSCF interface unit.
Note - When mounting an XSCF interface unit, check the connectors on both of the
chassis and XSCF interface unit beforehand to confirm that no pin is bent and all the
pins are neatly arranged in lines. If an XSCF interface unit is mounted with a bent pin
in a connector, the chassis or XSCF interface unit may be damaged. Also, carefully
proceed with the work to prevent any pin from being bent.
1.
Support the XSCF interface unit from below with one hand and then carefully
insert it into the chassis.
2.
Raise the right and left levers and tighten the two screws.
3.
Connect all the cables to the XSCF interface unit.
Note - Reinstall the cables in their original positions by referring to the notes that you made
before the start of maintenance.
Note - Ensure that the cables are firmly connected and secured.
20.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing an XSCF
interface unit.
1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
342
2.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
3.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 21
Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane
Unit of the Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar backplane unit
mounted in a crossbar box.
■
Location of the Crossbar Backplane Unit
21.1
■
Before Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar Backplane Unit
■
Removing the Crossbar Backplane Unit
■
Installing the Crossbar Backplane Unit
■
Restoring the System
Location of the Crossbar Backplane
Unit
This section describes the location of the crossbar backplane unit.
343
Figure 21-1
Location of crossbar backplane unit
(1)
21.2
Location
number
Component
1
Crossbar backplane unit (XBBPU)
Before Maintaining the Crossbar
Backplane Unit
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the crossbar
backplane unit.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
21.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 21-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar backplane unit. For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
344
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 21-1
Types of maintenance for crossbar backplane unit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Supported (*2)
*1:
*2:
If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
21.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 21-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar backplane
unit.
Table 21-2
21.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
21.3
2
Removing the crossbar backplane unit
21.4
3
Installing the crossbar backplane unit
21.5
4
Restoring the system
21.6
Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar
Backplane Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the
crossbar backplane unit.
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
345
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the crossbar backplane unit
requiring maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
21.4
Removing the Crossbar Backplane
Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing the crossbar backplane unit.
Enable the removal of the crossbar backplane unit before attempting to remove it. For
details, see "21.3 Enabling the Removal of the Crossbar Backplane Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
Partially pull out the following components, in order, from top to bottom.
You do not have to remove the cables of these components.
- XSCF unit
For details, see "17.4
Removing the XSCF Unit."
- XSCF interface unit
For details, see "20.4
Removing the XSCF Interface Unit."
- Crossbar unit or crossbar filler unit
For details, see "16.4 Removing a Crossbar Unit."
- Power supply unit
For details, see "18.4
346
Removing a Power Supply Unit."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
2.
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
3.
Remove all the fan units.
For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit."
4.
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and slide
the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the upper
cover (C in the figure).
Figure 21-2
B
A
5.
Removing the upper cover
C
B
A
Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then
slide the lower cover to the left to remove it.
Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
347
Figure 21-3
Removing the lower cover
A
6.
Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf.
Arrange the removed cables in the center.
Figure 21-4
7.
348
Removing the cables
Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan
shelf.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 21-5
8.
Removing the fan shelf
Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it
from the chassis.
Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the
center.
Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
9.
Loosen the two screws and remove the bracket (B in the figure) fixing the
guide plate (A in the figure).
Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
349
Figure 21-6
Removing the bracket
B
A
10. Slide the guide plate (A in the figure) to the front to remove it.
350
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 21-7
Removing guide plate
A
11. Remove the cable from the clamps.
Note - Move the clamps back to their original positions so that they do not foul the removal
of the crossbar backplane unit.
Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
351
Figure 21-8
Removing the cables
12. Loosen the five screws securing the crossbar backplane unit and then pull
the crossbar backplane unit straight out by holding the center handle (A in
the figure).
Note - Remove the unit carefully so as to not damage any cables.
Note - Place the removed crossbar backplane unit on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
352
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 21-9
Removing the crossbar backplane unit
A
21.5
Installing the Crossbar Backplane Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing the crossbar backplane unit.
1. Insert the crossbar backplane unit into the chassis and then tighten the five
screws.
2.
Fix the cables of the crossbar backplane unit with the clamps.
3.
Install the guide plate by sliding it towards the rear and then tighten the two
screws.
Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
353
Check the guide plate latch to ensure that the plate is securely installed.
4.
Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully
into the chassis.
Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf.
5.
Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf.
6.
Connect the two cables to the fan shelf.
7.
Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw.
8.
Install the upper cover.
9.
Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure
the cover with the two screws.
10. Install all the fan units.
For details, see "19.5 Installing a Fan Unit."
11. Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
12. Reinstall the following components in their original positions in the order
shown.
- Power supply unit
For details, see "18.5 Installing a Power Supply Unit."
- Crossbar unit or crossbar filler unit
For details, see "16.5 Installing a Crossbar Unit."
21.6
- XSCF interface unit
For details, see "20.5
Installing the XSCF Interface Unit."
- XSCF unit
For details, see "17.5
Installing the XSCF Unit."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing a
crossbar backplane unit.
1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
354
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the crossbar backplane unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
- When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables
is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the incorporated
physical partition is powered off:
The example below specifies the following:
00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: The BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify more than one of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
- When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables
is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is
powered on:
The example below specifies the following:
00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: The PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
5.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
355
356
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 22
Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the
Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the fan backplane mounted in
the crossbar box.
■
Configuration of the Fan Backplane
22.1
■
Before Maintaining the Fan Backplane
■
Enabling the Removal of the Fan Backplane
■
Removing the Fan Backplane
■
Installing the Fan Backplane
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Fan Backplane
This section describes the configuration and the location of the fan backplane.
The fan units are interconnected through the fan backplane.
357
Figure 22-1
Location of fan backplane
(1)
22.2
Location
number
Component
1
Fan backplane (FANBP)
Before Maintaining the Fan Backplane
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the fan backplane.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
358
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
22.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 22-1 lists the types of maintenance for the fan backplane. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 22-1
Types of maintenance for fan backplane
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Supported (*2)
*1:
*2:
If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All of the physical partitions must be stopped, and the system must be completely shut down.
22.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 22-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the fan backplane.
Table 22-2
22.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
22.3
2
Removing the fan backplane
22.4
3
Installing the fan backplane
22.5
4
Restoring the system
22.6
Enabling the Removal of the Fan
Backplane
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the
fan backplane.
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
Chapter 22
Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box
359
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the fan backplane requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
22.4
Removing the Fan Backplane
This section describes the procedure for removing the fan backplane.
Enable the removal of the fan backplane before attempting to remove it. For details,
see "22.3 Enabling the Removal of the Fan Backplane."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
22.4.1
Accessing the fan backplane
1.
360
Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
2.
22.4.2
Remove all the fan units.
For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit."
Removing the fan backplane
1.
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then
slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the
upper cover (C in the figure).
Figure 22-2
Removing the upper cover
B
C
A
2.
B
A
Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then
slide the lower cover to the left to remove it.
Chapter 22
Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box
361
Figure 22-3
Removing the lower cover
A
3.
Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf.
Arrange the removed cables in the center.
Figure 22-4
4.
362
Removing the cables
Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan
shelf.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 22-5
5.
Removing the fan shelf
Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it
from the chassis.
Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the
center.
Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
6.
Disconnect the two cables from the fan backplane.
Chapter 22
Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box
363
Figure 22-6
7.
364
Removing the cables
Remove the two screws securing the fan backplane to remove the bracket (A
in the figure).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 22-7
Removing the screws and bracket
A
8.
Remove the fan backplane.
Note - Place the removed fan backplane on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
22.5
Installing the Fan Backplane
This section describes the procedure for installing the fan backplane.
22.5.1
Installing the fan backplane
1.
Fit the fan backplane into the right- and left-hand notches in the fan shelf.
2.
Install the bracket of the fan backplane and secure it with two screws.
3.
Connect the two cables to the fan backplane.
4.
Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully
into the chassis.
Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf.
5.
Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf.
Chapter 22
Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the Crossbar Box
365
22.5.2
22.6
6.
Connect the two cables to the fan shelf.
7.
Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw.
8.
Install the upper cover.
9.
Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure
the cover with the two screws.
Restoring the chassis
1.
Install all the fan units.
For details, see "19.5.1 Installing a fan unit."
2.
Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the fan
backplane.
1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
366
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the fan backplane has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 23
Maintaining the Operation Panel of the
Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the operation panel mounted
on the crossbar box.
■
Location of the Operation Panel
23.1
■
Before Maintaining the Operation Panel
■
Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel
■
Removing the Operation Panel
■
Installing the Operation Panel
■
Restoring the System
Location of the Operation Panel
This section describes the location of the operation panel.
367
Figure 23-1
Location of the operation panel
(1)
23.2
Location
number
Component
1
Operation panel (OPNL)
Before Maintaining the Operation
Panel
This section describes the types and flow of the maintenance of the operation panel,
as well as some precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
23.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 23-1 lists the types of maintenance for the operation panel. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
368
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table 23-1
Types of maintenance for operation panel
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Supported (*2)
*1:
*2:
If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
23.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 23-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the operation panel.
Table 23-2
23.2.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
23.3
2
Removing the operation panel
23.4
3
Installing the operation panel
23.5
4
Restoring the system
23.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following point when replacing the operation panel:
■
If you replace the operation panel, set the BB-ID for the new operation panel to the
same value as that prior to the start of maintenance.
23.3
Enabling the Removal of the Operation
Panel
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the
operation panel.
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
Chapter 23
Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box
369
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the operation panel requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
23.4
Removing the Operation Panel
This section describes the procedure for removing the operation panel.
Enable the removal of the operation panel before attempting to remove it. For details,
see "23.3 Enabling the Removal of the Operation Panel."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
23.4.1
Accessing the operation panel
1.
370
Check the ID switch on the operation panel and record the BB-ID set for the
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
crossbar box requiring maintenance.
2.
Remove the front cover of the crossbar box.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
3.
Remove all the fan units.
For details, see "19.4.2 Removing a fan unit."
4.
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then
slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the
upper cover (C in the figure).
Figure 23-2
Removing the upper cover
B
C
A
5.
B
A
Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then
slide the lower cover to the left to remove it.
Chapter 23
Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box
371
Figure 23-3
Removing the lower cover
A
6.
Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf.
Arrange the removed cables in the center.
Figure 23-4
7.
372
Removing the cables
Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan
shelf.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 23-5
8.
Removing the fan shelf
Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it
from the chassis.
Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the
center.
Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
23.4.2
Removing the operation panel
1.
Remove the cable connecting the fan shelf to the operation panel.
Chapter 23
Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box
373
Figure 23-6
Operation panel cable
Front
2.
374
Loosen the one screw securing the operation panel and then remove it.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 23-7
Removing the operation panel
Front
Note - Place the removed operation panel on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
23.5
Installing the Operation Panel
This section describes the procedure for installing the operation panel.
Chapter 23
Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box
375
23.5.1
Installing the operation panel
1.
Set the BB-ID of the operation panel to the value prior to the start of
maintenance.
2.
Insert the operation panel into the fan shelf and then secure it with the screw.
Figure 23-8
Installing the operation panel
Front
3.
376
Reinstall the cable between the fan shelf and the operation panel.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 23-9
Operation panel cable
Front
23.5.2
Restoring the chassis
1.
Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and insert it into the chassis.
Then, tighten the three screws.
2.
Connect the two cables to the fan shelf.
3.
Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw.
4.
Install the upper cover and slide the right and left stoppers outwards. Then,
tighten the two screws to secure the upper cover.
5.
Install all the fan units.
Chapter 23
Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box
377
For details, see "19.5.1
6.
23.6
Installing a fan unit."
Install the front cover of the crossbar box.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the
operation panel.
1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
378
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the operation panel has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 24
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables
(Electrical)
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar cables (electrical).
■
Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
24.1
■
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
■
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
■
Removing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
■
Installing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Ports for the
Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
This section describes the configuration and the location of the ports that are used for
connecting crossbar cables (electrical).
The crossbar cables (electrical) are used make interconnections between SPARC
M10-4S systems.
Each crossbar cable (electrical) has a number that corresponds to a port number on
the chassis. A port number is assigned to each pair of ports. Crossbar cables
(electrical) should be replaced as a pair, therefore.
379
Figure 24-1
Connection ports for crossbar cables (electrical)
XBU#0
Figure 24-2
380
XBU#1
2R
2R
2R
2R
2L
2L
2L
2L
1R
1R
1R
1R
1L
1L
1L
1L
0R
0R
0R
0R
0L
0L
0L
0L
Crossbar cables (electrical)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
24.2
Location
number
Component
1
Crossbar cables (electrical) (CBL)
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable
(Electrical)
This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the crossbar
cables (electrical), as well as precautions that must be observed.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
24.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 24-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar cables (electrical). For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 24-1
Types of maintenance for crossbar cables (electrical)
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Without crossbar box
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
24.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 24-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar cables
(electrical).
Table 24-2
Maintenance flow
Task
Replacement
1
Preparation
24.3
2
Removing the crossbar cables (electrical)
24.4
3
Installing the crossbar cables (electrical)
24.5
4
Restoring the system
24.6
Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
381
24.2.3
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when replacing a crossbar cable (electrical):
Replace crossbar cables (electrical) in pairs.
■
24.3
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar
Cable (Electrical)
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the
crossbar cables (electrical). The preparation procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
24.3.1
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
382
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
24.3.2
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
383
24.4
Removing a Crossbar Cable
(Electrical)
This section describes the procedure for removing the crossbar cables (electrical).
Enable the removal of the crossbar cables (electrical) before attempting to remove
them. For details, see "24.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
384
Remove the two crossbar cables (electrical) from the SPARC M10-4S.
Remove the crossbar cable (electrical) by holding the tab (A in the figure) of the
cable and pulling it straight in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not
hold the cable part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part
without the connector lock completely released may cause damage.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 24-3
Removing the crossbar cables (electrical)
A
2.
24.5
Remove the two crossbar cables (electrical) from the other chassis.
Remove the crossbar cable (electrical) by holding the tab of the cable and pulling
it straight out in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not hold the cable
part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part without the
connector lock completely released may cause damage.
Installing a Crossbar Cable (Electrical)
This section describes the procedure for connecting the crossbar cables (electrical).
1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement
crossbar cable (electrical).
For the new crossbar cable (electrical), use the same type of label as the one on
the cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it.
2.
Connect a pair of crossbar cables (electrical) to each chassis.
Insert the crossbar cable (electrical) by holding the connector part of the cable
and inserting it straight into the opening. Do not hold the cable part when
Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
385
inserting the cable.
Note - If you insert a connector with the tab pulled, the connector may be damaged.
Note - Check that the crossbar cables (electrical) are correctly connected and secure.
24.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the
crossbar cables (electrical). The restoration procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
24.6.1
System-stopped maintenance
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
386
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
24.6.2
Checking log information."
5.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit of the chassis
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
Chapter 24 Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Electrical)
387
For details, see "3.3.5
388
Checking log information."
5.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 25
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables
(Optical)
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the crossbar cables (optical).
■
Configuration of the Ports for the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
25.1
■
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
■
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
■
Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
■
Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Ports for the
Crossbar Cables (Optical)
This section describes the configuration and the locations of the ports for connecting
the crossbar cables (optical).
The crossbar cables (optical) are used to connect the SPARC M10-4S to a crossbar box
in a building block configuration (with a crossbar box).
Each crossbar cable (optical) has a number that corresponds to a port number on the
chassis. A port number is assigned to each pair of ports. Crossbar cables (optical)
should be replaced as a pair, therefore.
389
Figure 25-1
Connection ports for crossbar cables (optical) (SPARC M10-4S)
XBU#0
Figure 25-2
XBU#1
2R
2R
2R
2R
2L
2L
2L
2L
1R
1R
1R
1R
1L
1L
1L
1L
0R
0R
0R
0R
0L
0L
0L
0L
Connection ports for crossbar cables (optical) (crossbar box)
L0 L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6 L7
R0 R1 R2 R3
R4 R5 R6 R7
L0 L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6 L7
R0 R1 R2 R3
R4 R5 R6 R7
L0 L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6 L7
R0 R1 R2 R3
R4 R5 R6 R7
L0 L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6 L7
R0 R1 R2 R3
R4 R5 R6 R7
L0 L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6 L7
R0 R1 R2 R3
R4 R5 R6 R7
L0 L1 L2 L3
L4 L5 L6 L7
R0 R1 R2 R3
R4 R5 R6 R7
#2
#1
#0
390
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 25-3
Crossbar cables (optical) (SPARC M10-4S)
Figure 25-4
Crossbar cables (optical) (crossbar box)
Location
number
Component
1
Crossbar cables (optical) (CBL)
Chapter 25
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
391
25.2
Before Maintaining a Crossbar Cable
(Optical)
This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the crossbar
cables (optical), as well as precautions that must be observed.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
25.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 25-1 lists the types of maintenance for the crossbar cables (optical). For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 25-1
Types of maintenance for crossbar cables (optical)
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
With a crossbar box
Unsupported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
Supported
25.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 25-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the crossbar cables
(optical).
Table 25-2
Maintenance flow
Task
25.2.3
Replacement
1
Preparation
25.3
2
Removing the crossbar cables (optical)
25.4
3
Installing the crossbar cables (optical)
25.5
4
Restoring the system
25.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following when replacing the crossbar cables (optical):
Replace the crossbar cables (optical) in pairs.
■
■
392
Do not place heavy objects on the crossbar cables (optical).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
■
25.3
Do not bend the crossbar cables (optical) unduly. If you unduly bend a crossbar
cable (optical), it may be damaged. Ensure that the static/dynamic bending radius
of the crossbar cable (optical) is no less than 35 mm (1.4 in.).
Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar
Cable (Optical)
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a
crossbar cable (optical). The preparation procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
25.3.1
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the SPARC M10-4S requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Chapter 25
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
393
7.
Remove all the power cords from the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
25.3.2
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the SPARC M10-4S requiring
maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
25.4
Removing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
This section describes the procedure for removing the crossbar cables (optical).
394
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Enable the removal of the crossbar cables (optical) before attempting to remove them.
For details, see "25.3 Enabling the Removal of a Crossbar Cable (Optical)."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
Remove the two crossbar cables (optical) from the SPARC M10-4S.
Remove the crossbar cable (optical) by holding the tab (A in the figure) of the
cable and pulling it straight in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not
hold the cable part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part
without the connector lock completely released may cause damage.
Figure 25-5
2.
Removing the crossbar cables (optical) (SPARC M10-4S)
Remove the other pair of crossbar cables (optical) from the crossbar box.
Remove the crossbar cable (optical) by holding the tab (A in the figure) of the
cable and pulling it straight in the direction of the arrow. At this time, do not
hold the cable part when pulling the crossbar cable. Pulling the cable part
without the connector lock completely released may cause damage.
Chapter 25
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
395
Note - There is no problem if you remove the crossbar cables at the crossbar box while
electricity is supplied.
Note - The cables at the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the
right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. To remove the crossbar cables
(optical), therefore, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support.
Figure 25-6
25.5
Removing the crossbar cables (optical) (crossbar box)
Installing a Crossbar Cable (Optical)
This section describes the procedure for connecting the crossbar cables (optical).
1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement
crossbar cable (optical).
For the new crossbar cable (optical), use the same type of label as the one on the
cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it.
2.
Connect a pair of crossbar cables (optical) to the SPARC M10-4S and the
crossbar box.
There are two types of crossbar cables (optical). Connect cables of the same type
to the same port number. Cables can be distinguished by tab shape. For the tab
shapes, see Figure 25-7.
Note - There is no problem if you connect the crossbar cables (optical) at the crossbar box
while electricity is supplied.
Note - If you insert a connector with the tab pulled, the connector may be damaged.
396
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 25-7
Crossbar cable (optical) shapes and tabs
(1)
(1)
Number in
figure
Description
1
Tab
Insert the crossbar cable (optical) by holding the connector part of the cable and
inserting it straight into the opening. Do not hold the cable part when inserting the
cable.
Note - Confirm that the crossbar cables (optical) are correctly connected and secure.
Note - After installing the crossbar cables (optical), use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle
the cables together and secure them to the rear cable support.
25.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the
crossbar cable (optical). The restoration procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
25.6.1
System-stopped maintenance
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all power cords to the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit requiring
maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Chapter 25
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
397
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that SPARC M10-4S has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
25.6.2
Checking log information."
5.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all power cords to the SPARC M10-4S power supply unit requiring
maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
398
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that SPARC M10-4S has been incorporated into the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "6.1
Command."
3.
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
Diagnosis is performed when the system board of the chassis connected with the
crossbar cables is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the
physical partition into which the chassis is incorporated is powered off.
The example below specifies the following:
00: BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is connected
(You can specify one or more of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
5.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 25
Maintaining the Crossbar Cables (Optical)
399
400
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 26
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control
Cables
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF BB control cables.
■
Configuration of the Ports for the XSCF BB Control Cables
26.1
■
Before Maintaining an XSCF BB Control Cable
■
Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB Control Cable
■
Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable
■
Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Ports for the
XSCF BB Control Cables
This section describes the configuration and the location of the ports to which the
XSCF BB control cables are connected.
The XSCF BB control cables are used to connect the XSCFs mounted in the SPARC
M10-4S or crossbar box chassis.
401
Figure 26-1
Locations of XSCF BB control cables (SPARC M10-4S)
(1)
Figure 26-2
Locations of XSCF BB control cables (crossbar box)
(1)
402
Location
number
Component
1
XSCF BB control cables (SCF_CBL)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
26.2
Before Maintaining an XSCF BB
Control Cable
This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the XSCF BB
control cables.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
26.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 26-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF BB control cables. For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 26-1
Types of maintenance for XSCF BB control cable
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
(without crossbar box)
Supported (*)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
(with crossbar box)
Supported (*)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
*: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If it is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a standby
XSCF.
26.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 26-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF BB control
cables.
Table 26-2
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
26.3
2
Removing the XSCF BB control cables
26.4
3
Installing the XSCF BB control cables
26.5
4
Restoring the system
26.6
Chapter 26
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
403
26.3
Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB
Control Cable
This section describes preparations that must be completed prior to removing the
XSCF BB control cables. The preparation procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
26.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby
XSCF.
Perform this when the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as a master
chassis.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby
6.
404
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
26.3.2
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Active/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
6.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply
unit of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
26.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
Chapter 26
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
405
For details, see "3.3.5
26.3.4
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply
unit of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
26.3.5
406
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply
unit of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
26.4
Removing an XSCF BB Control Cable
This section describes the procedure for removing the XSCF BB control cables.
Enable removal of the XSCF BB control cables before attempting to remove them. For
details, see "26.3 Enabling the Removal of an XSCF BB Control Cable."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
Remove the XSCF BB control cable from the SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar
box.
Pull out an XSCF BB control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A in
the figure) on the both sides of the cable.
Chapter 26
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
407
Note - The cables on the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the
right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. When removing the XSCF BB
control cables, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support.
Figure 26-3
Removing the XSCF BB control cables (SPARC M10-4S)
A
408
A
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 26-4
2.
26.5
Removing the XSCF BB control cables (crossbar box)
Remove the XSCF BB control cables from the other chassis.
Pull out an XSCF BB control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A in
the figure) on the both sides of the cable.
Installing an XSCF BB Control Cable
This section describes the procedure for installing the XSCF BB control cables.
1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the new replacement
XSCF BB control cable.
For the new XSCF BB control cable, use the same type of label as the one on the
cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it.
2.
Connect the XSCF BB control cable to SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box.
Chapter 26
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
409
Note - Check that the XSCF BB control cables are correctly connected and secure.
Note - After connecting the XSCF BB control cable, use the hook-and-loop fastener to bundle
the cables together and secure them to the rear cable support.
26.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the XSCF
BB control cables. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance
type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
26.6.1
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Execute the switchscf command to switch the standby XSCF to the master
XSCF.
Execute the command if the chassis requiring maintenance has been switched to
the standby XSCF.
XSCF> switchscf -t Active
3.
26.6.2
Close the rack door.
Active/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit
of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
410
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
26.6.3
26.6.4
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
3.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit
of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
26.6.5
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit
of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Chapter 26
Maintaining the XSCF BB Control Cables
411
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
412
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the chassis has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 27
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control
Cables
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the XSCF DUAL control cables.
■
Configuration of the XSCF DUAL Control Ports
27.1
■
Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
■
Enabling the Removal of an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
■
Removing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
■
Installing an XSCF DUAL Control Cable
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the XSCF DUAL
Control Ports
This section describes configuration and location of the XSCF DUAL control ports.
The XSCF DUAL control cable is used to connect the master XSCF and a standby
XSCF that are mounted on a SPARC M10-4S or crossbar box so as to duplicate the
XSCF.
413
Figure 27-1
Location of XSCF DUAL control port (SPARC M10-4S)
(1)
Figure 27-2
Location of XSCF DUAL control port (crossbar box)
(1)
414
Location number
Component
1
XSCF DUAL control cables (SCF_DUAL)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
27.2
Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL
Control Cable
This section describes the types and the flow of the maintenance of the XSCF DUAL
control cables.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
27.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 27-1 lists the types of maintenance for the XSCF DUAL control cables. For the
definition of maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 27-1
Types of maintenance for the XSCF DUAL control cables
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
(without crossbar box)
Supported (*)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Building block configuration
(with crossbar box)
Supported (*)
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
*: The XSCF must be configured as a slave before maintenance is started. If it is operating as the master XSCF, switch it to a standby
XSCF.
27.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 27-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the XSCF DUAL
control cables.
Table 27-2
Maintenance flow
Task
Replacement
1
Preparation
27.3
2
Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables
27.4
3
Installing the XSCF DUAL control cables
27.5
4
Restoring the system
27.6
Chapter 27
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables
415
27.3
Enabling the Removal of an XSCF
DUAL Control Cable
This section describes the preparation that must be completed prior to removing an
XSCF DUAL control cable. The preparation procedure differs depending on the
maintenance type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
27.3.1
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the switchscf command to switch the master XSCF to a standby
XSCF.
Perform this when the chassis requiring maintenance is operating as a master
chassis.
XSCF> switchscf -t Standby
6.
416
Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF DUAL control cable
requiring maintenance from the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
27.3.2
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Active/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF DUAL control cable
requiring maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
6.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply
unit of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
27.3.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
Chapter 27
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables
417
For details, see "3.3.5
27.3.4
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the XSCF DUAL control cable
requiring maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply
unit of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
27.3.5
418
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
Checking log information."
4.
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the chassis requiring maintenance
from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the PSU backplane unit or power supply
unit of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
27.4
Removing an XSCF DUAL Control
Cable
This section describes the procedure for removing an XSCF DUAL control cable.
Enable the removal of the XSCF DUAL control cables before attempting to remove
them. For details, see "27.2 Before Maintaining an XSCF DUAL Control Cable."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
1.
Remove the XSCF DUAL control cables from the SPARC M10-4S or the
crossbar box.
Pull out the XSCF DUAL control cable while pushing the lock release buttons (A
in the figure) on the both sides of the cable.
Chapter 27
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables
419
Note - The cables on the rear of the crossbar box are bundled together and fastened to the
right-hand cable support with a hook-and-loop fastener. To remove the XSCF DUAL control
cables, therefore, remove the hook-and-loop fastener from the cable support.
420
Figure 27-3
Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables (SPARC M10-4S)
Figure 27-4
Removing the XSCF DUAL control cables (crossbar box)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
2.
27.5
Remove the XSCF DUAL control cables from the other chassis.
Pull out the XSCF DUAL control cable while pushing the lock release buttons on
the both sides of the cable.
Installing an XSCF DUAL Control
Cable
This section describes the procedure for installing an XSCF DUAL control cable.
1. Attach the supplied connection destination label to the replacement XSCF
DUAL control cable.
For the new XSCF DUAL control cable, use the same type of label as the one on
the cable requiring maintenance and write the same port number on it.
2.
Connect the XSCF DUAL control cable to SPARC M10-4S or the crossbar box.
Note - Check that XSCF DUAL control cable is correctly connected and secure.
Note - After connecting the XSCF DUAL control cable, use the hook-and-loop fastener to
bundle the cables together and fasten them to rear cable support.
27.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the XSCF
DUAL control cables. The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance
type as follows:
■
Active/Hot maintenance
27.6.1
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
Inactive/Hot maintenance
■
Inactive/Cold maintenance
■
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Hot maintenance
1.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
2.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the FRU is operating
Chapter 27
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables
421
normally after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
3.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
4.
27.6.2
Close the rack door.
Active/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit
of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the showstatus command to confirm that the XSCF DUAL control
cable is operating normally after the completion of maintenance.
XSCF> showstatus
4.
Execute the showhardconf command to check the hardware configuration
and the status of each component.
XSCF> showhardconf
5.
27.6.3
Inactive/Hot maintenance
1.
422
Close the rack door.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
For details, see "6.1
Command."
27.6.4
Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
2.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
3.
Close the rack door.
Inactive/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit
of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
27.6.5
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on the physical partition requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords to the PSU backplane unit or power supply unit
of the chassis requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the XSCF DUAL control cable has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
4.
Close the rack door.
Chapter 27
Maintaining the XSCF DUAL Control Cables
423
424
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the
Crossbar Box
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the cable kit mounted on the
crossbar box.
■
Configuration of the Cable Kit
28.1
■
Before Maintaining the Cable Kit
■
Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit
■
Removing the Cable Kit
■
Installing the Cable Kit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Cable Kit
This section describes the configuration and location of the cable kit.
The cable kit is a set of cables for connections between the crossbar backplane unit
and terminal board and between the terminal board and fan backplane.
The cable kit contains the following cables.
28.1.1
Cables for the connection between the crossbar
backplane unit and terminal board
■
Cable (SIG)
Cable for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board
(SIG)
425
Figure 28-1
Cable (SIG) (between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board)
(1)
(2)
Location number
Component
1
Connector (terminal board (SIG) side)
2
Connector (crossbar backplane unit side)
■
Cable (PWR)
Cable for the connection between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board
(PWR)
Figure 28-2
Cable (PWR) (between the crossbar backplane unit and terminal
board)
(1)
426
(2)
Location number
Component
1
Connector (terminal board (PWR) side)
2
Connector (crossbar backplane unit side)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
28.1.2
Cables for the connection between the terminal
board and fan backplane
■
Cable (PWR)
Cable for the connection between the terminal board and fan backplane (PWR)
Figure 28-3
Cable (PWR) (between the terminal board and fan backplane)
(1)
(2)
Location number
Component
1
Connector (terminal board side)
2
Connector (fan backplane (PWR) side)
■
Cable (SIG)
Cable for the connection of the terminal board and fan backplane (SIG) to the
operation panel
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
427
Figure 28-4
Cable (SIG) (for the terminal board and fan backplane to the
operation panel)
(1)
(2)
(3)
28.1.3
Location number
Component
1
Connector (terminal board side)
2
Connector (fan backplane (SIG) side)
3
Connector (operation panel side)
Locations for the cable kit
The locations of cable kit connections are as follows.
428
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-5
Locations for the cable kit
(5)
(4)
(3) (2)
28.2
(1)
Location
number
Component
Connection
1
Cable (SIG)
Crossbar backplane unit and terminal board (SIG)
2
Cable (PWR)
Crossbar backplane unit and terminal board (PWR)
3
Terminal board
4
Cable (SIG)
Terminal board (SIG) and fan backplane
5
Cable (PWR)
Terminal board (PWR) and fan backplane
Before Maintaining the Cable Kit
This section describes the types and the flow of maintenance of the cable kit.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
28.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 28-1 lists the types of maintenance for the cable kit. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
429
Table 28-1
Types of maintenance for cable kit
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Unsupported
Unsupported
(*1)
Supported (*2)
*1: If any physical partition is currently operating, the crossbar box cannot be powered off.
*2: All the physical partitions must be powered off, and the system must be completely shut down.
28.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 28-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the cable kit.
Table 28-2
28.3
Maintenance flow
Details of update process
Replacement
1
Preparation
28.3
2
Removing the cable kit
28.4
3
Installing the cable kit
28.5
4
Restoring the system
28.6
Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing the
cable kit.
Caution - To completely shut down the system, all the power cords must be
removed. If the power cords are not removed, an electrical failure may occur.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Log in to the XSCF shell.
3.
Execute the showlogs command to identify the component requiring
maintenance.
XSCF> showlogs error
For details, see "3.3.5
4.
430
Checking log information."
Confirm the hardware and software configurations.
For details, see "4.2 Confirming the System Configuration."
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
5.
Power off all the physical partitions.
For details, see "5.3 Powering Off the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Execute the replacefru command to release the crossbar backplane unit
requiring maintenance from the system.
XSCF> replacefru
For details, see "5.1
Command."
7.
Releasing an FRU from the System with the replacefru
Remove all the power cords from the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "5.5.2 Removing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, make a note of the locations of the power cords
before disconnecting them to ensure that they are reinstalled correctly.
28.4
Removing the Cable Kit
This section describes the procedure for removing the cable kit at each cable
connection destination.
For the cable connection destinations, see "28.1 Configuration of the Cable Kit."
Enable the removal of the cable kit before attempting to remove it. For details, see
"28.3 Enabling the Removal of the Cable Kit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
28.4.1
Removing the cables for the connection between
the crossbar backplane unit and terminal board
Remove the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the crossbar backplane unit and
terminal board.
1. Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
2.
Remove all the fan units.
For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit."
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
431
3.
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then
slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the
upper cover (C in the figure).
Figure 28-6
Removing the upper cover
B
C
A
4.
A
Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then
slide the lower cover to the left to remove it.
Figure 28-7
Removing the lower cover
A
5.
432
B
Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf.
Arrange the removed cables in the center.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-8
6.
Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan
shelf.
Figure 28-9
7.
Removing the cables
Removing the fan shelf
Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it
from the chassis.
Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the
center.
Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
8.
Remove the cable connected to the crossbar backplane unit from the connector.
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
433
Figure 28-10
434
Removing the cable (cable (SIG))
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-11
9.
Removing the cable (cable (PWR))
Remove the cable from the clamps.
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
435
Figure 28-12
28.4.2
Removing the cables
Removing the cables for the connection between
the terminal board and fan backplane
Remove the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the terminal board and fan
backplane.
1. Remove the front cover.
For details, see "5.5.3 Removing the front cover."
436
2.
Remove all the fan units.
For details, see "19.4 Removing a Fan Unit."
3.
Loosen the two screws (A in the figure) securing the upper cover and then
slide the right and left stoppers (B in the figure) inwards. Then, remove the
upper cover (C in the figure).
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-13
Removing the upper cover
B
C
B
A
4.
A
Loosen the one screw (A in the figure) securing the lower cover and then
slide the lower cover to the left to remove it.
Figure 28-14
Removing the lower cover
A
5.
Disconnect the two cables from the fan shelf.
Arrange the removed cables in the center.
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
437
Figure 28-15
6.
Loosen the three screws securing the fan shelf and partially pull out the fan
shelf.
Figure 28-16
7.
Removing the cables
Removing the fan shelf
Place a hand under the fan shelf to support it and then carefully remove it
from the chassis.
Note - Remove the fan shelf while paying careful attention to the two cables arranged in the
center.
Note - Place the removed fan shelf on a grounded antistatic ESD mat.
8.
438
Remove the cable connecting the fan backplane from the connector.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-17
Removing the cable (cable (PWR))
Figure 28-18
Removing the cable (cable (SIG))
9.
Remove the cable connecting the fan shelf and operation panel from the
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
439
connector on the operation panel.
Perform this step only when removing the cable (SIG).
To remove the cable (PWR), proceed to step 10.
Figure 28-19
Operation panel cable
Front
10. Remove the cable from the terminal board.
■
For the cable (PWR), push the connector toward the back while pushing up
the lower latch (A in the figure) with a flathead screwdriver. Confirm that the
lower latch (A in the figure) has been pushed to the back of the terminal
board. Push the connector toward the back while pushing down the upper
latch (B in the figure) with a flathead screwdriver.
440
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-20
Removing the cable (cable (PWR))
B
A
■
For the cable (SIG), remove the two cable connector screws with a Phillips
screwdriver (bit No. 1), and then remove the cable from the terminal board.
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
441
Figure 28-21
Removing the cable (cable (SIG))
11. Remove the cable from the clamps.
442
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-22
Removing the cable (cable (PWR))
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
443
Figure 28-23
28.5
Removing the cable (cable (SIG))
Installing the Cable Kit
This section describes the procedure for installing the cable kit at each cable
connection destination.
For the cable connection destinations, see "28.1 Configuration of the Cable Kit."
Install a cable that has the same shape as the removed cable.
28.5.1
Installing a cable between the crossbar backplane
unit and terminal board
Install the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the crossbar backplane unit and
terminal board.
1. Connect the cable to the connector of the crossbar backplane unit.
Install the cable that has the same shape as the removed cable.
444
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-24
Connector shape (cable (SIG))
2.
Secure the cable with a clamp.
3.
Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully
into the chassis.
Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf.
4.
Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf.
5.
Connect the two cables to the fan shelf.
6.
Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw.
7.
Install the upper cover.
8.
Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure
the cover with the two screws.
9.
Install all the fan units.
For details, see "19.5 Installing a Fan Unit."
10. Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
28.5.2
Installing a cable for the connection between the
terminal board and fan backplane
Install the cable (SIG) or cable (PWR) connecting the terminal board and fan backplane.
1. Install the cable on the terminal board.
- For the cable (PWR), install the connector that has latches (A in the figure) on
both ends to the terminal board.
Install the tab (B in the figure) of the connector such that it fits in the notched
section (C in the figure) of the terminal board.
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
445
Figure 28-25
Installing the cable (cable (PWR))
A
C
B
- For the cable (SIG), install the connector that has a threaded hole to the
terminal board.
Use the screw that was removed from the same location before. Tighten the
screw with a Phillips screwdriver (bit No. 1). When installing the connector,
orient the connector so that the dot mark (A in the figure) is on the left as
shown in Figure 28-26.
446
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-26
Installing the cable (cable (SIG))
A
2.
Connect the cable to the connector of the fan backplane.
3.
Connect the cable connecting the fan shelf and operation panel to the
connector on the operation panel.
Perform this step only when installing the cable (SIG).
To install the cable (PWR), proceed to step 4.
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
447
Figure 28-27
Operation panel cable
Front
4.
448
Secure the cable with a clamp.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 28-28
Securing the cable (cable (PWR))
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
449
Figure 28-29
Securing the cable (cable (SIG))
5.
Support the fan shelf from below with one hand and then insert it carefully
into the chassis.
Arranging the cables in the center makes it easier to install the fan shelf.
6.
Tighten the three screws securing the fan shelf.
7.
Connect the two cables to the fan shelf.
8.
Install the lower cover and then secure it with the one screw.
9.
Install the upper cover.
10. Slide the right and left stoppers of the upper cover outwards and then secure
the cover with the two screws.
11. Install all the fan units.
For details, see "19.5 Installing a Fan Unit."
12. Install the front cover.
For details, see "6.5.3 Installing the front cover."
450
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
28.6
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the cable
kit.
1. Connect all the power cords to the power supply unit of the crossbar box
requiring maintenance.
For details, see "6.5.1 Installing the power cord."
Note - In the case of a dual power feed, connect the power cords in their original positions by
referring to the record that you made before the start of maintenance.
2.
Return to the operation of the XSCF firmware replacefru command to confirm
that the crossbar backplane unit has been incorporated into the system.
For details, see "6.1 Incorporating an FRU into the System with the replacefru
Command."
3.
Execute the diagxbu command to diagnose the crossbar cables.
- When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables
is not incorporated into the physical partition, or when the incorporated
physical partition is powered off:
The example below specifies the following:
00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
01: The BB-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify more than one of these.)
To specify multiple connection destination BB-IDs, enter a command like
"diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01 -t 02".
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -t 01
- When the system board of the chassis connected with the crossbar cables
is incorporated into the physical partition, and the physical partition is
powered on:
The example below specifies the following:
00: The BB-ID of the chassis to start the diagnosis
02: The PPAR-ID of the destination where the chassis to start the diagnosis is
connected (You can specify only one of these.)
XSCF> diagxbu -y -b 00 -p 02
4.
Execute the showlogs command to confirm that the system is operating
normally.
XSCF> showlogs error
Chapter 28
Maintaining the Cable Kit of the Crossbar Box
451
For details, see "3.3.5
452
Checking log information."
5.
Power on all the physical partitions.
For details, see "6.3 Powering On the Physical Partition Requiring Maintenance."
6.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Chapter 29
Maintaining the Dedicated Power
Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack
for Expanded Connection
This chapter describes the procedure for maintaining the dedicated power
distribution unit (PDU) mounted on the rack for expanded connection.
■
Configuration of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
29.1
■
Before Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
■
Enabling the Removal of the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
■
Removing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
■
Installing the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
■
Restoring the System
Configuration of the Dedicated Power
Distribution Unit
This section describes the configuration and location of the PDU.
The PDU is installed on the rack for expanded connection. It is compatible with both
single- and three-phase power feeds.
453
Figure 29-1
Location of the PDU
(4)
(2)
(3)
(1)
Rear
Location number
Component
1
Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#0)
2
Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#1)
3
Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#2) (*)
4
Dedicated power distribution unit (PDU#3) (*)
*: This is mounted when the two expanded connection racks have been installed.
454
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
29.2
Before Maintaining the Dedicated
Power Distribution Unit
This section describes the types and flow of maintenance of the PDU, as well as some
precautions.
Note - Read and understand the instructions in this chapter before starting the maintenance
work. Also see the contents of "Chapter 1 Before Starting Maintenance Work."
29.2.1
Types of maintenance
Table 29-1 lists the types of maintenance for the PDU. For the definition of
maintenance, see "4.3 Understanding Types of Maintenance."
Table 29-1
Types of PDU maintenance
Configuration
Active/hot
Active/cold
Inactive/hot
Inactive/cold
System stopped
Building block configuration
Unsupported
Supported
Unsupported
Unsupported
Supported
29.2.2
Maintenance flow
Table 29-2 lists the sequence of the maintenance procedure for the PDU.
Table 29-2
Maintenance flow
Task
29.2.3
Replacement
1
Preparation
29.3
2
Removing the PDU
29.4
3
Installing the PDU
29.5
4
Restoring the system
29.6
Precautions for replacement
Note the following points when you replace a PDU.
■
The SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box are connected to the two PDUs with
power cords. Thus the system can continue to operate even if one of the PDUs
fails. Do not, however, operate the system for an extended period when one unit
Chapter 29
Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection
455
has failed.
■
29.3
When replacing multiple PDUs, replace one unit at a time. If redundancy of the
PDUs cannot be preserved, then system-stopped maintenance must be performed.
Enabling the Removal of the
Dedicated Power Distribution Unit
This section describes the preparations that must be completed prior to removing a
PDU. The preparation procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows:
■
Active/Cold maintenance
■
29.3.1
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
Caution - Active/cold maintenance can be performed only when the power supply unit has a
redundant configuration.
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Disconnect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes
from the PDU requiring maintenance.
Note - Make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them, to ensure
that they are reconnected correctly.
29.3.2
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Open the rack door.
2.
Stop the entire system.
For details, see "5.4 Stopping the Entire System."
3.
Disconnect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes
from the PDU requiring maintenance.
Note - Make a note of the locations of the power cords before disconnecting them, to ensure
that they are reconnected correctly.
456
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
29.4
Removing the Dedicated Power
Distribution Unit
This section describes the procedure for removing the dedicated power distribution
unit.
Enable the removal of the dedicated power distribution unit before attempting to
remove it. For details, see "29.3 Enabling the Removal of the Dedicated Power
Distribution Unit."
Caution - Before you handle any components, wear a wrist strap to ground any static
electricity. If you perform this procedure without a wrist strap, individual
components or the overall system may be damaged. For details, see "1.5 Notes
Regarding Static Electricity."
Caution - Two people must be present when the power cables are to be removed. If
you perform this work alone, you may injure yourself or cause damage to the PDU
because the PDU is heavy.
1.
Chapter 29
Remove the four PDU screws.
Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection
457
Figure 29-2
2.
458
PDU screws
Grasp the top and bottom of the PDU, and then pull it out.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure 29-3
3.
Pulling out the PDU
Disconnect all the power cables from the rear of the PDU.
Note - Hold the plugs of the power cables, and then pull them straight out.
Chapter 29
Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection
459
Figure 29-4
PDU power cables
The number of power cables and the plug type may vary depending on the
power environment, as follows:
- For a single-phase power feed:
Four power cables are connected to the PDU. To pull them out, push the upper
and lower latches (A in the figure).
Figure 29-5
Power cable connector for single-phase power feed
A
A
- For a three-phase power feed:
Three power cables are connected to the PDU. To pull them out, turn the ring
460
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
(A in the figure) counterclockwise.
Figure 29-6
Power cable connector for three-phase power feed
A
29.5
Installing the Dedicated Power
Distribution Unit
This section describes the procedure for installing a PDU.
1. Connect all the power cables to the rear of the PDU.
Note - Hold each power cable plug, and then insert it straight into the socket.
- For a single-phase power feed:
Connect four power cables to the PDU.
- For a three-phase power feed
Connect three power cables to the PDU. Install each power cable by holding its
plug, and then secure it by turning the ring clockwise.
Note - Ensure that the power cables are correctly connected and secure.
29.6
2.
Install the PDU into the rack for expanded connection.
3.
Install the four PDU screws.
Restoring the System
This section describes the procedure for restoring the system after installing the PDU.
The restoration procedure differs depending on the maintenance type as follows:
■
Active/Cold maintenance
Chapter 29
Maintaining the Dedicated Power Distribution Unit Mounted on the Rack for Expanded Connection
461
■
29.6.1
System-stopped maintenance
Active/Cold maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes to the
PDU requiring maintenance.
Note - Reconnect the power cords at their original locations by referring to the notes you
made prior to the start of maintenance.
2.
29.6.2
Close the rack door.
System-stopped maintenance
1.
Connect all the power cords of the SPARC M10-4S and crossbar boxes to the
PDU requiring maintenance.
Note - Reconnect the power cords at their original locations by referring to the notes you
made prior to the start of maintenance.
462
2.
Start the entire system.
For details, see "6.4 Starting the Entire System."
3.
Close the rack door.
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Appendix A
Component List
This appendix describes components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S, the
crossbar box, and the expanded connection rack.
Figure A-1
Locations of components of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
(1)
(15)
(14)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(13)
(4)
(5)
(12)
(6)
(7)
(11)
(8)
(10)
(9)
463
Location number
Component
1
CPU memory unit upper
2
Side cover
3
Memory
4
PSU backplane unit
5
Fan shelf
6
Fan unit
7
Front cover
8
Internal disk
9
Power supply unit
10
Operation panel
11
PCI Express card cassette
12
PCI Express card
13
Crossbar unit mounting frame (*)
14
Crossbar unit (*)
15
CPU memory unit lower
*: Not mounted on SPARC M10-4.
464
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure A-2
Locations of components of crossbar box
(1)
(14)
(2)
(13)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
Location number
Component
1
XSCF interface unit
2
Crossbar backplane unit
3
Fan backplane
4
Fan shelf
5
Fan unit
6
Upper cover
7
Lower cover
8
Front cover
9
Guide plate fixing bracket
10
Guide plate
11
Operation panel
12
Power supply unit
13
Crossbar unit
Appendix A
Component List
465
Location number
Component
14
XSCF unit
Figure A-3
Locations of components of expanded connection rack
(2)
(3)
(1)
Rear
466
Location number
Component
1
Dedicated power distribution unit
2
Expanded connection rack
3
Crossbar box
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Appendix B
Component Specifications
This appendix provides the specifications of the components.
The components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box are
as follows.
Components that constitute the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
■
CPU Memory Unit
■
Crossbar Unit
■
Power Supply Unit
■
Fan Unit
■
Internal Disk Drive
■
PCI Express Card
■
Backplanes
■
Operation Panel
Components that constitute the crossbar box
B.1
■
Crossbar Unit
■
XSCF Unit
■
XSCF Interface Unit
■
Power Supply Unit
■
Fan Unit
■
Backplanes
■
Operation Panel
CPU Memory Unit
The CPU memory unit of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S consists of two units: the upper
467
unit and lower unit.
The CPU memory unit lower consists of the following components.
■
CPU
■
Memory
■
XSCF
■
PCI Express (PCIe) backplane
The CPU memory unit upper consists of the following components.
CPU
■
■
Memory
CPU and XSCF are directly installed on the CPU memory unit. Thus you cannot
replace the CPU and XSCF individually.
Each CPU memory unit upper and CPU memory unit lower is available in eight
different types based on the combination of CPU type and the number of memory
slots.
Table B-1 lists the specifications of the CPU memory unit.
Table B-1
Specifications of CPU memory unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Maximum number of
CPU memory units
2
Location
Inside of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement, expansion, and reduction
For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 7 Maintaining the CPU Memory Units."
B.2
Crossbar Unit
The crossbar units of the SPARC M10-4S and the crossbar box are crossbar switches
that logically connect the CPU memory unit and I/O unit. The crossbar unit has two
operation modes. One is normal mode that provides 2-way operation. The other is
degraded mode that provides 1-way operation, which is half of normal mode.
Table B-2 and Table B-3 list the specifications of the crossbar units of the SPARC
M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively.
Table B-2
468
Specifications of crossbar unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Number of crossbar units
2
Location
Rear of chassis
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table B-2
Specifications of crossbar unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) (continued)
Item
Description
Type of maintenance
Inactive/cold and system-stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
Table B-3
Specifications of crossbar unit (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of crossbar units
3
Location
Rear of chassis
Type of maintenance
System stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures:
SPARC M10-4S: Chapter 9 Maintaining the Crossbar Units
Crossbar box: Chapter 16 Maintaining the Crossbar Units of the Crossbar Box
B.3
XSCF Unit
The XSCF unit of the crossbar box is a control unit that is central to the system.
The functions of an XSCF are as follows:
■
Controlling each unit
■
Console function for each physical partition that uses the TTY communication
protocol
■
Communication with each physical partition that uses a command interface
■
Managing system information
■
Browser-based user interface function
■
Connection with a maintenance terminal
■
Next remote chassis interface
■
System power control and cluster control that use a power supply interlocking
function
Table B-4 lists the specifications of the XSCF unit of the crossbar box.
Table B-4
Specifications of XSCF unit (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of XSCF units
1
Location
Rear of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped
Appendix B
Component Specifications
469
Table B-4
Specifications of XSCF unit (crossbar box) (continued)
Item
Description
Maintenance category
Replacement
For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 17
Crossbar Box."
B.4
Maintaining the XSCF Unit of the
Power Supply Unit
The power supply units of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box take
power from the input power and supply it to the system. The redundant configuration
of the power supply units allows the system to continue operating even if one of the
units fails during operation.
Table B-5 and Table B-6 list the specifications of the power supply units of the
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively.
Table B-5
Specifications of the power supply unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Number of power supply
units
2
Location
Front of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/hot, active/cold, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, and system
stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
Table B-6
Specifications of power supply unit (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of power supply
units
2
Location
Rear of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures:
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S: Chapter 10 Maintaining the Power Supply Units
Crossbar box: Chapter 18 Maintaining the Power Supply Units of the Crossbar Box
470
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
B.5
Fan Unit
Five fan units are mounted on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and four on the crossbar
box. They provide a flow of air to cool the inside of the chassis. Each fan unit has two
cooling fans.
Table B-7 and Table B-8 list the specifications of the fan units of the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively.
Table B-7
Specifications of fan unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Number of fan units
5
Location
Front of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/hot, active/cold, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, and system
stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
Table B-8
Specifications of fan unit (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of fan units
4
Location
Front of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures:
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S: Chapter 11 Maintaining the Fan Units
Crossbar box: Chapter 19 Maintaining the Fan Units of the Crossbar Box
B.6
Internal Disk Drive
Up to eight hard disks or solid state disks can be mounted as internal disks on
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S.
Table B-9 lists the specifications of the internal disk drive.
Table B-9
Specifications of the internal disk drive (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Maximum number of
internal disk drives
8
Interface
SAS
Appendix B
Component Specifications
471
Table B-9
Specifications of the internal disk drive (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S) (continued)
Item
Description
Location
Front of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/hot, active/cold, inactive/hot, inactive/cold, and system
stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement, expansion, and reduction
For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 12
B.7
Maintaining the Internal Disks."
PCI Express Card
Up to eight PCIe cards can be mounted in a SPARC M10-4S with a crossbar unit
mounted. For a SPARC M10-4 with no crossbar unit mounted, up to 11 PCIe cards
can be mounted.
Table B-10 lists the specifications of the PCIe card.
Table B-10
Specifications of PCIe card (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Maximum number of
PCIe cards
11 (*)
Location
Rear of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/hot, inactive/hot, and system stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement, expansion, and reduction
*: Can be mounted only on a SPARC M10-4.
For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 13 Maintaining the PCI Express Cards."
B.8
XSCF Interface Unit
The XSCF interface unit of the crossbar box mounts the identification information.
The XSCF interface unit and each of the other units are connected by the crossbar
backplane unit.
Table B-11 lists the specifications of the XSCF interface unit of the crossbar box.
Table B-11
472
Specifications of XSCF interface unit (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of XSCF interface
units
1
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table B-11
Specifications of XSCF interface unit (crossbar box) (continue d)
Item
Description
Location
Rear of chassis
Type of maintenance
System stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 20
Unit of the Crossbar Box."
B.9
Maintaining the XSCF Interface
Backplanes
The backplanes of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box have connectors
for connecting replaceable units in the chassis. The PSU backplane unit of SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S mounts the memory that stores the identification information and the
user setting information.
The backplane of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is shown below.
■
PSU backplane unit (A in the figure)
Appendix B
Component Specifications
473
Figure B-1
Location of backplane of SPARC M10-4/M10-4S
A
Table B-12 lists the specifications of the PSU backplane unit.
Table B-12
Specifications of PSU backplane unit (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Number of PSU
backplane units
1
Location
Inside of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
For the maintenance procedure, see "Chapter 14
Unit."
Maintaining the PSU Backplane
The backplanes of the crossbar box are shown below.
Crossbar backplane unit (A in the figure)
■
■
474
Fan backplane (B in the figure)
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Figure B-2
Locations of backplanes of crossbar box
B
A
Table B-13 and Table B-14 list the specifications of the crossbar backplane and the fan
backplane units, respectively.
Table B-13
Specifications of crossbar backplane unit (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of crossbar
backplane units
1
Location
Inside of chassis
Type of maintenance
System stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
Table B-14
Specifications of fan backplane (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of fan backplanes
1
Appendix B
Component Specifications
475
Table B-14
Specifications of fan backplane (crossbar box) (continue d)
Item
Description
Location
Inside of chassis
Type of maintenance
System stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures:
Crossbar backplane unit of crossbar box: Chapter 21 Maintaining the Crossbar
Backplane Unit of the Crossbar Box
Fan backplane of crossbar box: Chapter 22 Maintaining the Fan Backplane of the
Crossbar Box
B.10
Operation Panel
The operation panels of the PARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box are installed
in the front of the chassis. This panel displays the system status and is used for
operation.
Table B-15 and Table B-16 list the specifications of the operation panels of the SPARC
M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box, respectively.
Table B-15
Specifications of operation panel (SPARC M10-4/M10-4S)
Item
Description
Number of operation
panels
1
Location
Front of chassis
Type of maintenance
Active/cold, inactive/cold, and system stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
Table B-16
Specifications of operation panel (crossbar box)
Item
Description
Number of operation
panels
1
Location
Front of chassis
Type of maintenance
System stopped
Maintenance category
Replacement
See the following chapters for details of the maintenance procedures:
SPARC M10-4/M10-4S: Chapter 15 Maintaining the Operation Panel
Crossbar box: Chapter 23 Maintaining the Operation Panel of the Crossbar Box
476
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Appendix C
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting
Commands
This appendix describes how to use Oracle Solaris commands to display fault
diagnosis information and to take countermeasures. The commands listed here are
useful for determining whether there are problems in the system, the network, or
some other system connected through the network.
■
iostat(1M) Command
C.1
■
prtdiag(1M) Command
■
prtconf(1M) Command
■
netstat(1M) Command
■
ping(1M) Command
■
ps(1) Command
■
prstat(1M) Command
iostat(1M) Command
The iostat(1M) command periodically reports the CPU usage status, as well as the
terminal status, the drive status, and the I/O status.
Table C-1 lists the options of the iostat(1M) command and how those options can be
applied to solving system issues.
Table C-1
iostat(1M) command options
Option
Description
Application
No options
Reports the status of the local I/O
device.
Allows you to view the device
status concisely in 3 lines.
-c
Reports the rates of periods during
which the system has been in user
mode, system mode, I/O waiting,
and idling.
Allows you to view the CPU status
as a concise report.
477
Table C-1
iostat(1M) command options (continued)
Option
Description
Application
-e
Displays a summary of statistics on
the device errors. Displayed items
are the total number of errors,
hardware errors, software errors,
and transfer errors.
Allows you to view the accumulated
number of errors as a concise table
and to identify potentially failed
I/O devices.
-E
Displays the entire statistics of the
device errors.
Allows you to view device
information (manufacturer, model
number, serial number, size, and
errors).
-n
Displays the names in a descriptive
form.
Allows you to identify devices with
a descriptive display.
-x
Reports the extended drive statistics
of individual drives. Statistics are
displayed in a table format.
Similar to the -e option, but differs
in that it provides rate information.
Allows you to find internal devices
and other I/O devices on the
network whose performance is low.
The following example shows the iostat(1M) command output.
# iostat -En
c5t50000393D85129FAd0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors:
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC
Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC201AL6
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
c3t50000393D851FDAAd0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors:
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC
Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC201AMS
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
c4t50000393D822D2B6d0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors:
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC
Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC2015P8
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
c2t50000393E8001BB6d0 Soft Errors: 0 Hard Errors: 0 Transport Errors:
Vendor: TOSHIBA Product: MBF2300RC
Revision: 3706 Serial No:
EB25PC301AV6
Size: 300.00GB <300000000000 bytes>
Media Error: 0 Device Not Ready: 0 No Device: 0 Recoverable: 0
Illegal Request: 0 Predictive Failure Analysis: 0
#
478
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
0
0
0
0
C.2
prtdiag(1M) Command
The prtdiag(1M) command displays information on system settings and diagnosis.
Diagnosis information displays FRUs in the system that experienced errors.
The prtdiag(1M) command is in the following directory: /usr/platform/platformname/sbin/.
The prtdiag(1M) command may display a slot number that differs from those
supposed to be displayed according to other parts of this manual. This does not
indicate a fault.
Table C-2 lists the options of the prtdiag(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.
Table C-2
prtdiag(1M) command option
Option
Description
Application
No options
Displays a list of components.
Allows you to check the CPU
information, the memory
configuration, the mounted PCI
Express (PCIe) cards, the
OpenBootPROM version, the mode
switch status, and the CPU
operation mode.
-v
Displays information in detailed
(Verbose) mode.
In addition to the content displayed
when no option is specified, this
option allows you to check detailed
information of the PCIe card.
The following example shows the prtdiag(1M) command output.
# prtdiag -v
System Configuration: Oracle Corporation
Memory size: 64000 Megabytes
sun4v SPARC M10-4
================================ Virtual CPUs ================================
CPU ID
-----0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Frequency
--------3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
3000 MHz
Implementation
---------------------SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
SPARC64-X
Status
------on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
on-line
Appendix C
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands
479
11
3000 MHz SPARC64-X
on-line
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------59
3000 MHz SPARC64-X
on-line
60
3000 MHz SPARC64-X
on-line
61
3000 MHz SPARC64-X
on-line
62
3000 MHz SPARC64-X
on-line
63
3000 MHz SPARC64-X
on-line
======================= Physical Memory Configuration ========================
Segment Table:
-------------------------------------------------------------Base
Segment Interleave
Bank
Contains
Address
Size
Factor
Size
Modules
-------------------------------------------------------------0x0
32 GB
4
8 GB
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM00A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM01A
8 GB
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM02A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM03A
8 GB
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM04A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM05A
8 GB
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM06A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP0/MEM07A
0x20000000000
32 GB
4
8 GB
8 GB
8 GB
8 GB
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM10A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM11A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM12A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM13A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM14A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM15A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM16A
/BB0/CMUL/CMP1/MEM17A
================================ IO Devices ================================
Slot +
Bus
Name +
Model
Speed
Status
Type Path
---------------------------------------------------------------------------/BB0/CMUL/SASHBA PCIE scsi-pciex1000,87
LSI,2308_2 5.0GTx8
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/scsi@0
/BB0/CMUL/NET0
PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656
2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9/network@0
/BB0/CMUL/NET1
PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656
2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@9/network@0,1
/BB0/CMUL/NET2
PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656
2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a/network@0
/BB0/CMUL/NET3
PCIE network-pciex14e4,1656
2.5GTx1
/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@a/network@0,1
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE ethernet-pciex1077,8000
5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@0/ethernet@0
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE ethernet-pciex1077,8000
5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@0/ethernet@0,1
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE QLGC,qlc-pciex1077,8001
QLE8152
5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
480
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
pci@0/pci@0/QLGC,qlc@0,2
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE QLGC,qlc-pciex1077,8001
QLE8152
5.0GTx4
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@0/QLGC,qlc@0,3
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE emlx-pciex10df,f100
LPe12002-M8-FJ2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@10/pci@0/pci@0/emlx@0
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE emlx-pciex10df,f100
LPe12002-M8-FJ2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@10/pci@0/pci@0/emlx@0,1
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd
SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd
SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,1
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd
SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,2
/BB0/PCI0
PCIE network-pciex108e,abcd
SUNW,pcie-qgc2.5GTx8
/pci@8100/pci@4/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@0/pci@1/
pci@0/pci@11/pci@0/pci@0/network@0,3
MB
PCIX usb-pciclass,0c0310
-/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@1/pci@0/usb@4
MB
PCIX usb-pciclass,0c0320
-/pci@8000/pci@4/pci@0/pci@1/pci@0/usb@4,1
============================ Environmental Status ============================
============================ FRU Status ============================
Location
Name
Status
-----------------------------------------------------SYS
enabled
============================ FW Version ============================
Version
-----------------------------------------------------------2002
====================== System PROM revisions =======================
Version
-----------------------------------------------------------OBP 4.34.0 2012/08/15 17:56
Chassis Serial Number
--------------------2081203001
#
Appendix C
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands
481
C.3
prtconf(1M) Command
The prtconf(1M) command displays a list of configured devices.
The prtconf(1M) command identifies hardware units recognized by Oracle Solaris.
When a software application experiences a hardware-related issue even though there
is no hardware error, this command allows you to check whether Oracle Solaris
recognizes the hardware and whether the hardware drivers are loaded.
Table C-3 lists the options of the prtconf(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.
Table C-3
prtconf(1M) command options
Option
Description
Application
No options
Displays a device tree for the
devices recognized by Oracle Solaris.
A hardware device is regarded as
operating normally if it is
recognized. If the message "(driver
not attached)" is displayed for a
device or a sub-device, the driver
for the device is corrupted or does
not exist.
-D
The displayed content is similar to
the case when there are no options,
but is different in that it contains
device driver names.
Allows you to check the driver
necessary for Oracle Solaris to
enable the device, or to view a list
of drivers to be used.
-p
The display content is similar to the
case when there are no options, but
is different in that the display is
simpler.
Allows you to view the devices as a
simple list.
-V
Displays the version and date of the
OpenBoot PROM firmware.
Allows you to check the firmware
version quickly.
The following example shows the prtconf(1M) command output.
# prtconf
System Configuration: Oracle Corporation
Memory size: 131304 Megabytes
System Peripherals (Software Nodes):
sun4v
ORCL,SPARC64-X
scsi_vhci, instance #0
packages (driver not attached)
SUNW,builtin-drivers (driver not attached)
SUNW,probe-error-handler (driver not attached)
deblocker (driver not attached)
disk-label (driver not attached)
terminal-emulator (driver not attached)
dropins (driver not attached)
SUNW,asr (driver not attached)
kbd-translator (driver not attached)
482
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
obp-tftp (driver not attached)
zfs-file-system (driver not attached)
hsfs-file-system (driver not attached)
chosen (driver not attached)
openprom (driver not attached)
client-services (driver not attached)
options, instance #0
aliases (driver not attached)
memory (driver not attached)
virtual-memory (driver not attached)
iscsi-hba (driver not attached)
disk (driver not attached)
virtual-devices, instance #0
console, instance #0
rtc (driver not attached)
flashprom (driver not attached)
console (driver not attached)
channel-devices, instance #0
virtual-channel, instance #0
virtual-channel, instance #3
virtual-console-concentrator, instance #0
virtual-network-switch, instance #0
virtual-disk-server, instance #0
virtual-channel-client, instance #1
virtual-channel-client, instance #2
pciv-communication, instance #0
virtual-domain-service, instance #0
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
cpu (driver not attached)
pci, instance #0
pci, instance #0
pci, instance #1
pci, instance #2
scsi, instance #0
iport, instance #8
smp, instance #3
disk, instance #8
enclosure, instance #3
iport, instance #11
pci, instance #3
pci, instance #5
usb, instance #0
usb, instance #0
hub, instance #0
pci, instance #4
network, instance #0
network, instance #1
pci, instance #6
Appendix C
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands
483
network, instance #2
network, instance #3
pci, instance #1
pci, instance #7
pci, instance #8
pci, instance #9
pci, instance #10
pci, instance #11
pci, instance #2
pci, instance #12
pci, instance #13
pci, instance #14
pci, instance #15
pci, instance #16
pci, instance #17
pci, instance #3
pci, instance #18
pci, instance #19
pci, instance #20
pci, instance #21
pci, instance #22
pci, instance #23
pci, instance #4
pci, instance #24
pci, instance #25
pci, instance #26
scsi, instance #1
iport, instance #6
smp, instance #1
disk, instance #6
enclosure, instance #1
iport, instance #9
pci, instance #27
pci, instance #29
usb, instance #1
usb, instance #1
hub, instance #2
pci, instance #28
network, instance #4
network, instance #5
pci, instance #30
network, instance #6
network, instance #7
------------------------Ommitted-----------------------pci, instance #22
pci, instance #101
pci, instance #102
pci, instance #103
pci, instance #104
pci, instance #19
pci, instance #105
pci, instance #23
pci, instance #106
pci, instance #107
pci, instance #108
484
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
pci, instance #109
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
pci-performance-counters, instance
ramdisk-root (driver not attached)
os-io (driver not attached)
fcoe, instance #0
iscsi, instance #0
pseudo, instance #0
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
#16
#20
#17
#21
#18
#22
#19
#23
#
C.4
netstat(1M) Command
The netstat(1M) command displays the network status and the protocol statistics.
This command allows you to view a list of connections maintained by the host and
their status. This command also allows you to check the packet statistics and error
conditions of IP, TCP, and UDP.
Table C-4 lists the options of the netstat(1M) command and how those options can be
applied to solving issues.
Appendix C
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands
485
Table C-4
netstat(1M) command options
Option
Description
Application
-i
Displays the interface status. The
displayed content includes
information on incoming and
outgoing packets, incoming and
outgoing errors, collisions, and
queues.
Allows you to view a concise
overview of the network status.
-i interval
Specifying a numeric value after the
-i option executes the netstat(1M)
command at intervals of the
specified number of seconds.
Identifies intermittent or long-term
network events. You can view
nighttime events at a glance by
piping the netstat output to a file.
-p
Displays the media table.
Allows you to check the MAC
addresses of the host on the
subnetwork.
-r
Displays the routing table.
Allows you to check the routing
information.
-n
Converts a host name into an IP
address and then displays it.
Allows you to check the IP address
instead of the host name.
The following example shows the netstat(1M) command output.
# netstat -p
Net to Media Table: IPv4
Device
IP Address
------ -------------------net0
4S-111-D0
net0
10.24.187.1
net0
224.0.0.22
Net to Media Table: IPv6
If
Physical Address
----- ----------------net0 33:33:00:00:00:01
net0 33:33:00:00:00:02
net0 33:33:00:01:00:02
net0 33:33:00:00:00:16
net0 b0:99:28:98:30:36
net0 33:33:ff:98:30:36
Mask
--------------255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
Type
------other
other
other
other
local
other
Flags
Phys Addr
-------- --------------SPLA
b0:99:28:98:30:36
00:0a:b8:50:cd:42
S
01:00:5e:00:00:16
State
-----------REACHABLE
REACHABLE
REACHABLE
REACHABLE
REACHABLE
REACHABLE
Destination/Mask
--------------------------ff02::1
ff02::2
ff02::1:2
ff02::16
fe80::b299:28ff:fe98:3036
ff02::1:ff98:3036
#
C.5
ping(1M) Command
The ping(1M) command sends the ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet to network hosts.
486
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
In certain configurations of the ping(1M) command, the command output allows you
to identify a network link or a node that has experienced a problem. The destination
host is specified by the variable: hostname.
Table C-5 lists the options of the ping(1M) command and how those options are
useful for troubleshooting.
Table C-5
ping(1M) command options
Option
Description
Application
hostname
When you send a probe packet to
hostname, a message is returned.
Allows you to confirm that a host is
active on the network.
-g hostname
Forces the probe packet to go
through the specified gateway.
Allows you to test the quality of
individual routes by sending the
packet to the target host via various
routes specified.
-i interface
Specifies the interface to be used for
sending and receiving a probe
packet.
Allows you to easily check the
secondary network interface.
-n
Converts a host name into an IP
address and then displays it.
Allows you to check the IP address
instead of the host name.
-s
ping is repeated at intervals of 1
second.
Pressing the [Ctrl] + [C] keys stops
ping, and then displays the statistics.
Allows you to check intermittent or
long-term network events. You can
view nighttime network events at
one time by piping the ping output
to a file.
-svR
Displays the routes that probe
packets have passed through at
intervals of 1 second.
Displays the routes and hop counts
of probe packets, allowing you to
compare multiple routes to identify
any bottleneck.
The following example shows the ping(1M) command output.
# ping -s 10.24.187.50
PING 10.24.187.50: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=0. time=0.555 ms
64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=1. time=0.400 ms
64 bytes from 10.24.187.50: icmp_seq=2. time=0.447 ms
^C
----10.24.187.50 PING Statistics---3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max/stddev = 0.400/0.467/0.555/0.079
#
Appendix C
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands
487
C.6
ps(1) Command
The ps(1) command displays a list of process statuses. When no options are specified,
the command displays information of processes that have the same execution user ID
as the executing user and the same control terminal.
If you specify an option, output information is controlled by the option.
Table C-6 lists the options of the ps(1M) command and how those options are useful
for troubleshooting.
Table C-6
ps(1M) command options
Option
Description
Application
-e
Displays information on various
processes.
Allows you to view the process IDs
and files that can be executed.
-f
Generates a complete list.
Allows you to view process
information such as the user ID, the
parent process ID, the execution
time, and the paths to the executed
files.
-o option
Selects any items from those that
can be configured as outputs.
Options of pid, pcpu, pmem, and
comm display the process ID, CPU
usage, memory usage, and the
corresponding executable files,
respectively.
Allows you to check only the most
important information. By knowing
the resource usage rate, you can
identify processes that potentially
affect the system performance and
cause hang ups.
The following example shows the ps(1M) command output.
# ps -eo pcpu,pid,comm|sort -rn
%CPU
PID COMMAND
0.0
674 sort
0.0
673 ps
0.0
637 -bash
0.0
636 login
0.0
634 /usr/sbin/in.telnetd
0.0
629 -bash
0.0
613 /usr/bin/login
0.0
602 /usr/lib/devchassis/devchassisd
0.0
600 /opt/SUNWldm/bin/ldmd
0.0
581 /usr/lib/inet/in.ndpd
0.0
580 /sbin/dhcpagent
0.0
577 /usr/lib/rmvolmgr
0.0
548 /usr/sbin/auditd
0.0
519 /usr/sbin/syslogd
0.0
508 /usr/lib/ssh/sshd
0.0
497 /usr/lib/fm/fmd/fmd
0.0
487 /usr/lib/hal/hald-addon-cpufreq
0.0
472 /usr/lib/autofs/automountd
488
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
470
468
458
453
450
421
413
382
369
332
297
272
179
176
171
164
161
158
128
112
98
74
73
59
38
13
11
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
0
/usr/lib/autofs/automountd
/usr/lib/inet/inetd
hald-runner
/usr/lib/hal/hald
/usr/sbin/rpcbind
/usr/lib/inet/proftpd
/usr/sbin/cron
/lib/svc/method/iscsid
/usr/lib/efcode/sparcv9/efdaemon
/usr/sbin/nscd
/usr/lib/picl/picld
/lib/inet/nwamd
/usr/lib/devfsadm/devfsadmd
/usr/lib/zones/zonestatd
/usr/lib/ldoms/drd
/usr/lib/ldoms/ldmad
/usr/lib/utmpd
/usr/lib/dbus-daemon
/usr/lib/sysevent/syseventd
/usr/lib/pfexecd
/lib/inet/in.mpathd
/lib/crypto/kcfd
/lib/inet/ipmgmtd
/usr/sbin/dlmgmtd
/lib/inet/netcfgd
/lib/svc/bin/svc.configd
/lib/svc/bin/svc.startd
vmtasks
intrd
kmem_task
zpool-rpool
fsflush
pageout
/usr/sbin/init
sched
#
C.7
prstat(1M) Command
The prstat(1M) command repeatedly tests all the active processes on the system, and
provides statistics based on the specified output mode and sorting order. The output
of the prstat(1M) command is similar to that of the ps(1M) command.
Table C-7 lists the options of the prstat(1M) command and how those options can be
applied to solving issues.
Appendix C
Oracle Solaris Troubleshooting Commands
489
Table C-7
prstat(1M) command options
Option
Description
Application
No options
Displays a list of processes sorted in
descending order of CPU resource
consumption. The list is restricted
by the height of the terminal
window and the number of
processes. The output is automatically
updated every 5 seconds, and is
stopped by pressing the [Ctrl] + [C]
keys.
The output allows you to view
process IDs, the User IDs, memory
usage, status, CPU usage, and
command names.
-n number
Restricts the number of lines in the
output.
Limits the amount of displayed
data, so that you can identify those
processes that are consuming
excessive amounts of resources.
-s key
Sorts the list by key parameter.
The list can be sorted by cpu
(default), time, and size.
-v
Displays the information in detailed
mode.
Allows you to view other
parameters.
The following example shows the prstat(1M) command output.
# prstat -n 5 -s size
PID USERNAME SIZE
RSS STATE
PRI NICE
TIME CPU PROCESS/NLWP
497 root
55M
49M sleep
59
0
0:01:12 0.0% fmd/37
600 root
41M
36M sleep
59
0
0:09:13 0.0% ldmd/13
11 root
37M
33M sleep
59
0
0:00:17 0.0% svc.startd/12
468 root
24M
12M sleep
59
0
0:00:00 0.0% inetd/4
13 root
20M
19M sleep
59
0
0:00:37 0.0% svc.configd/24
Total: 49 processes, 669 lwps, load averages: 0.05, 0.05, 0.04
#
490
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Appendix D
External Interface Specifications
This appendix describes the specifications of the external interface connectors and the
switch for the XSCF provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the crossbar box.
The external interface connectors provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S are as follows.
■
Serial Port
■
USB Port
■
SAS Port
The external interface connectors provided on the crossbar box are as follows.
Serial Port
■
■
USB Port
The switch for the XSCF that is provided on the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S will be as
follows:
■
RESET Switch
D.1
Serial Port
Table D-1 lists the specifications of the serial ports of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and
the crossbar box.
491
Table D-1
Serial port
Pin arrangement
D.1.1
Signal
name
Input/Output
Description
1
RTS
Output
Transmission request
2
DTR
Output
Data terminal ready
3
TXD
Output
Transmitted data
4
GND
---
Ground
5
GND
---
Ground
6
RXD
Input
Received data
7
DSR
Input
Data set ready
8
CTS
Input
Transmission possible
Wire connection chart for serial cable
Figure D-1
D.2
Pin
number
Wire connection chart of serial cable
USB Port
Table D-2 lists the specifications of the USB port of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S and the
crossbar box.
492
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Table D-2
USB port
Pin arrangement
D.3
Pin
number
Signal
name
Input/Output
Description
1
VBUS
Output
Power supply
2
-DATA
Input/
Output
Data
3
+DATA
Input/
Output
Data
4
GND
---
Ground
SAS Port
The SAS port of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is used to connect external devices with
an SAS interface, such as a tape drive. The chassis has one SAS port on the rear.
Consult a service engineer for more information about compatible devices.
D.4
RESET Switch
The RESET switch of the SPARC M10-4/M10-4S is an emergency switch to restart the
XSCF. For how to use the RESET switch, see "17.2 Precautions concerning Using the
RESET Switch" in the Fujitsu M10/SPARC M10 Systems System Operation and
Administration Guide.
Figure D-2 indicates the RESET switch location of the SPARC M10-4 while Figure D-3
indicates the RESET switch location of the SPARC M10-4S. The RESET switch (A in
the figure) is located on the rear of the chassis.
Appendix D
External Interface Specifications
493
Figure D-2
RESET switch location (SPARC M10-4)
A
Figure D-3
RESET switch location (SPARC M10-4S)
A
494
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual ･ December 2013
Index
C
L
cable kit, 425
cable, types of, 29
component list, 463
component specifications, 467
components, names and locations of, 11
CPU memory unit, 83
crossbar backplane unit, 343
crossbar cable (electrical), 379
crossbar cable (optical), 389
crossbar unit, 179, 297
labels, 2
LED indications, 23
D
dedicated power distribution unit, 453
E
emergency power off, 8
entire system, starting, 74
entire system, stopping, 62
external interface, 491
M
maintenance, preparing for, 41
maintenance, types of, 44
memory, 159
O
operation panel, 281, 367
Oracle Solaris, 477
P
PCI Express card, 239
physical partition, powering off, 60
physical partition, powering on, 73
power supply unit, 191, 317
PSU backplane unit, 265
S
F
system, restoring, 69
failure, identifying, 34
fan backplane, 357
fan unit, 205, 327
T
I
W
internal disk, 219
warning labels, 2
tags, 2
495
X
XSCF BB control cable, 401
XSCF DUAL control cable, 413
XSCF interface unit, 337
XSCF unit, 307
496
Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual • December 2013
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Extract, Print high-res XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-20:48:00 Create Date : 2013:12:18 10:06:01+09:00 Modify Date : 2013:12:19 17:25:40+09:00 Metadata Date : 2013:12:19 17:25:40+09:00 Trapped : False Producer : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.3 (Windows) GTS PDFX Conformance : PDF/X-1a:2001 GTS PDFX Version : PDF/X-1:2001 Format : application/pdf Title : Fujitsu M10-4/Fujitsu M10-4S/SPARC M10-4/SPARC M10-4S Service Manual Description : C120-E682-06EN Creator : FUJITSU LIMITED Document ID : uuid:393fe2f6-1cff-43ce-9d68-c5fbd8aabc2d Instance ID : uuid:93564aa2-1886-452e-b993-a88aadffd321 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 520 Author : FUJITSU LIMITED Subject : C120-E682-06ENEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools